74 files changed, 4226 insertions, 1621 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 8b0563633442..43e89b1537d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -134,8 +134,6 @@ dvb/
         - info on Linux Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) subsystem.
 early-userspace/
         - info about initramfs, klibc, and userspace early during boot.
-ecryptfs.txt
-        - docs on eCryptfs: stacked cryptographic filesystem for Linux.
 eisa.txt
         - info on EISA bus support.
 exception.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index cc7a8c39fb6f..b939ebb62871 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -68,6 +68,9 @@ size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into the
 consistent allocate.  cpu_addr must be the virtual address returned by
 the consistent allocate.
 
+Note that unlike their sibling allocation calls, these routines
+may only be called with IRQs enabled.
+
 
 Part Ib - Using small dma-coherent buffers
 ------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
index 08687e45e19d..1a7f53068ec2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
             procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml \
             kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml \
             gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
-            genericirq.xml
+            genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
index 90ed23df1f68..361c884d860d 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
@@ -316,7 +316,8 @@ CPU B:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&dev_lock, flags)
 
   <chapter id="pubfunctions">
      <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
-!Einclude/asm-i386/io.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/io_32.h
+!Elib/iomap.c
   </chapter>
 
 </book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
index b886f52a9aac..230cbf753782 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/atomic.h
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/unaligned.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/atomic_32.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/unaligned_32.h
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title>
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
 !Elib/string.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>Bit Operations</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/bitops.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/bitops_32.h
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
@@ -155,8 +155,8 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
 !Emm/slab.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/uaccess.h
-!Earch/i386/lib/usercopy.c
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h
+!Earch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>More Memory Management Functions</title>
 !Emm/readahead.c
@@ -240,17 +240,23 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
      <sect1><title>Driver Support</title>
 !Enet/core/dev.c
 !Enet/ethernet/eth.c
+!Enet/sched/sch_generic.c
 !Iinclude/linux/etherdevice.h
+!Iinclude/linux/netdevice.h
+     </sect1>
+     <sect1><title>PHY Support</title>
 !Edrivers/net/phy/phy.c
 !Idrivers/net/phy/phy.c
 !Edrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
 !Idrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
 !Edrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
 !Idrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
+     </sect1>
 <!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
+     <sect1><title>Wireless</title>
 X!Enet/core/wireless.c
--->
      </sect1>
+-->
      <sect1><title>Synchronous PPP</title>
 !Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c
      </sect1>
@@ -287,7 +293,7 @@ X!Ekernel/module.c
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>MTRR Handling</title>
-!Earch/i386/kernel/cpu/mtrr/main.c
+!Earch/x86/kernel/cpu/mtrr/main.c
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>PCI Support Library</title>
@@ -310,14 +316,14 @@ X!Edrivers/pci/hotplug.c
      <sect1><title>MCA Architecture</title>
         <sect2><title>MCA Device Functions</title>
            <para>
-              Refer to the file arch/i386/kernel/mca.c for more information.
+              Refer to the file arch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c for more information.
            </para>
 <!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
-X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
+X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c
 -->
         </sect2>
         <sect2><title>MCA Bus DMA</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/mca_dma.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h
         </sect2>
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
index 582032eea872..4c63e5864160 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
@@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
   </para>
 
   <para>
-   <filename>include/asm-i386/delay.h:</filename>
+   <filename>include/asm-x86/delay_32.h:</filename>
   </para>
   <programlisting>
 #define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \
@@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
 </programlisting>
 
   <para>
-   <filename>include/asm-i386/uaccess.h:</filename>
+   <filename>include/asm-x86/uaccess_32.h:</filename>
   </para>
 
   <programlisting>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
index 42a760cd7467..529a53dc1389 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mcabook.tmpl
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@
 
   <chapter id="dmafunctions">
      <title>DMA Functions Provided</title>
-!Iinclude/asm-i386/mca_dma.h
+!Iinclude/asm-x86/mca_dma.h
   </chapter>
 
 </book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
index a8c8cce50633..6fbc41d98c1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
@@ -275,16 +275,13 @@ int __init board_init (void)
         int err = 0;
 
         /* Allocate memory for MTD device structure and private data */
-        board_mtd = kmalloc (sizeof(struct mtd_info) + sizeof (struct nand_chip), GFP_KERNEL);
+        board_mtd = kzalloc(sizeof(struct mtd_info) + sizeof(struct nand_chip), GFP_KERNEL);
         if (!board_mtd) {
                 printk ("Unable to allocate NAND MTD device structure.\n");
                 err = -ENOMEM;
                 goto out;
         }
 
-        /* Initialize structures */
-        memset ((char *) board_mtd, 0, sizeof(struct mtd_info) + sizeof(struct nand_chip));
-
         /* map physical adress */
         baseaddr = (unsigned long)ioremap(CHIP_PHYSICAL_ADDRESS, 1024);
         if(!baseaddr){
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..254e769282a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+        "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="s390drivers">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>Writing s390 channel device drivers</title>
+
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Cornelia</firstname>
+    <surname>Huck</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+       <email>cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2007</year>
+   <holder>IBM Corp.</holder>
+  </copyright>
+
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+     License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+     version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
+     version.
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+     MA 02111-1307 USA
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+     distribution of Linux.
+   </para>
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <chapter id="intro">
+   <title>Introduction</title>
+  <para>
+    This document describes the interfaces available for device drivers that
+    drive s390 based channel attached devices. This includes interfaces for
+    interaction with the hardware and interfaces for interacting with the
+    common driver core. Those interfaces are provided by the s390 common I/O
+    layer.
+  </para>
+  <para>
+    The document assumes a familarity with the technical terms associated
+    with the s390 channel I/O architecture. For a description of this
+    architecture, please refer to the "z/Architecture: Principles of
+    Operation", IBM publication no. SA22-7832.
+  </para>
+  <para>
+    While most I/O devices on a s390 system are typically driven through the
+    channel I/O mechanism described here, there are various other methods
+    (like the diag interface). These are out of the scope of this document.
+  </para>
+  <para>
+    Some additional information can also be found in the kernel source
+    under Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt.
+  </para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="ccw">
+   <title>The ccw bus</title>
+  <para>
+        The ccw bus typically contains the majority of devices available to
+        a s390 system. Named after the channel command word (ccw), the basic
+        command structure used to address its devices, the ccw bus contains
+        so-called channel attached devices. They are addressed via subchannels,
+        visible on the css bus. A device driver, however, will never interact
+        with the subchannel directly, but only via the device on the ccw bus,
+        the ccw device.
+  </para>
+    <sect1 id="channelIO">
+     <title>I/O functions for channel-attached devices</title>
+    <para>
+      Some hardware structures have been translated into C structures for use
+      by the common I/O layer and device drivers. For more information on
+      the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles
+      of Operation.
+    </para>
+!Iinclude/asm-s390/cio.h
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="ccwdev">
+     <title>ccw devices</title>
+    <para>
+      Devices that want to initiate channel I/O need to attach to the ccw bus.
+      Interaction with the driver core is done via the common I/O layer, which
+      provides the abstractions of ccw devices and ccw device drivers.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The functions that initiate or terminate channel I/O all act upon a
+      ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions
+      or strange side effects may happen.
+    </para>
+!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwdev.h
+!Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c
+!Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1 id="cmf">
+     <title>The channel-measurement facility</title>
+  <para>
+        The channel-measurement facility provides a means to collect
+        measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem
+        for each channel attached device.
+  </para>
+!Iinclude/asm-s390/cmb.h
+!Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="ccwgroup">
+   <title>The ccwgroup bus</title>
+  <para>
+        The ccwgroup bus only contains artificial devices, created by the user.
+        Many networking devices (e.g. qeth) are in fact composed of several
+        ccw devices (like read, write and data channel for qeth). The
+        ccwgroup bus provides a mechanism to create a meta-device which
+        contains those ccw devices as slave devices and can be associated
+        with the netdevice.
+  </para>
+   <sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices">
+    <title>ccw group devices</title>
+!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwgroup.h
+!Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c
+   </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+</book>
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index f8cc3f8ed152..c64e969dc33b 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ tools.  One such tool that is particularly recommended is the Linux
 Cross-Reference project, which is able to present source code in a
 self-referential, indexed webpage format. An excellent up-to-date
 repository of the kernel code may be found at:
-        http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/
+        http://users.sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/
 
 
 The development process
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ One of the best ways to put into practice your hacking skills is by fixing
 bugs reported by other people. Not only you will help to make the kernel
 more stable, you'll learn to fix real world problems and you will improve
 your skills, and other developers will be aware of your presence. Fixing
-bugs is one of the best ways to earn merit amongst the developers, because
+bugs is one of the best ways to get merits among other developers, because
 not many people like wasting time fixing other people's bugs.
 
 To work in the already reported bug reports, go to http://bugzilla.kernel.org.
diff --git a/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt
index 0d8240774fca..a51f693c1541 100644
--- a/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/MSI-HOWTO.txt
@@ -241,68 +241,7 @@ address space of the MSI-X table/MSI-X PBA. Otherwise, the PCI subsystem
 will fail enabling MSI-X on its hardware device when it calls the function
 pci_enable_msix().
 
-5.3.2 Handling MSI-X allocation
-
-Determining the number of MSI-X vectors allocated to a function is
-dependent on the number of MSI capable devices and MSI-X capable
-devices populated in the system. The policy of allocating MSI-X
-vectors to a function is defined as the following:
-
-#of MSI-X vectors allocated to a function = (x - y)/z where
-
-x =     The number of available PCI vector resources by the time
-        the device driver calls pci_enable_msix(). The PCI vector
-        resources is the sum of the number of unassigned vectors
-        (new) and the number of released vectors when any MSI/MSI-X
-        device driver switches its hardware device back to a legacy
-        mode or is hot-removed. The number of unassigned vectors
-        may exclude some vectors reserved, as defined in parameter
-        NR_HP_RESERVED_VECTORS, for the case where the system is
-        capable of supporting hot-add/hot-remove operations. Users
-        may change the value defined in NR_HR_RESERVED_VECTORS to
-        meet their specific needs.
-
-y =     The number of MSI capable devices populated in the system.
-        This policy ensures that each MSI capable device has its
-        vector reserved to avoid the case where some MSI-X capable
-        drivers may attempt to claim all available vector resources.
-
-z =     The number of MSI-X capable devices populated in the system.
-        This policy ensures that maximum (x - y) is distributed
-        evenly among MSI-X capable devices.
-
-Note that the PCI subsystem scans y and z during a bus enumeration.
-When the PCI subsystem completes configuring MSI/MSI-X capability
-structure of a device as requested by its device driver, y/z is
-decremented accordingly.
-
-5.3.3 Handling MSI-X shortages
-
-For the case where fewer MSI-X vectors are allocated to a function
-than requested, the function pci_enable_msix() will return the
-maximum number of MSI-X vectors available to the caller. A device
-driver may re-send its request with fewer or equal vectors indicated
-in the return. For example, if a device driver requests 5 vectors, but
-the number of available vectors is 3 vectors, a value of 3 will be
-returned as a result of pci_enable_msix() call. A function could be
-designed for its driver to use only 3 MSI-X table entries as
-different combinations as ABC--, A-B-C, A--CB, etc. Note that this
-patch does not support multiple entries with the same vector. Such
-attempt by a device driver to use 5 MSI-X table entries with 3 vectors
-as ABBCC, AABCC, BCCBA, etc will result as a failure by the function
-pci_enable_msix(). Below are the reasons why supporting multiple
-entries with the same vector is an undesirable solution.
-
-        - The PCI subsystem cannot determine the entry that
-          generated the message to mask/unmask MSI while handling
-          software driver ISR. Attempting to walk through all MSI-X
-          table entries (2048 max) to mask/unmask any match vector
-          is an undesirable solution.
-
-        - Walking through all MSI-X table entries (2048 max) to handle
-          SMP affinity of any match vector is an undesirable solution.
-
-5.3.4 API pci_enable_msix
+5.3.2 API pci_enable_msix
 
 int pci_enable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev, struct msix_entry *entries, int nvec)
 
@@ -339,7 +278,7 @@ a failure. This failure may be a result of duplicate entries
 specified in second argument, or a result of no available vector,
 or a result of failing to initialize MSI-X table entries.
 
-5.3.5 API pci_disable_msix
+5.3.3 API pci_disable_msix
 
 void pci_disable_msix(struct pci_dev *dev)
 
@@ -349,7 +288,7 @@ always call free_irq() on all MSI-X vectors it has done request_irq()
 on before calling this API. Failure to do so results in a BUG_ON() and
 a device will be left with MSI-X enabled and leaks its vectors.
 
-5.3.6 MSI-X mode vs. legacy mode diagram
+5.3.4 MSI-X mode vs. legacy mode diagram
 
 The below diagram shows the events which switch the interrupt
 mode on the MSI-X capable device function between MSI-X mode and
@@ -407,7 +346,7 @@ between MSI mod MSI-X mode during a run-time.
 MSI/MSI-X support requires support from both system hardware and
 individual hardware device functions.
 
-5.5.1 System hardware support
+5.5.1 Required x86 hardware support
 
 Since the target of MSI address is the local APIC CPU, enabling
 MSI/MSI-X support in the Linux kernel is dependent on whether existing
diff --git a/Documentation/ManagementStyle b/Documentation/ManagementStyle
index cbbebfb51ffe..49a8efa5afeb 100644
--- a/Documentation/ManagementStyle
+++ b/Documentation/ManagementStyle
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ To solve this problem, you really only have two options:
 The option of being unfailingly polite really doesn't exist. Nobody will
 trust somebody who is so clearly hiding his true character.
 
-(*) Paul Simon sang "Fifty Ways to Lose Your Lover", because quite
+(*) Paul Simon sang "Fifty Ways to Leave Your Lover", because quite
 frankly, "A Million Ways to Tell a Developer He Is a D*ckhead" doesn't
 scan nearly as well.  But I'm sure he thought about it. 
 
diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
index d6b45a9b29b4..a30dd4480ad4 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ the reviewers time and will get your patch rejected, probably
 without even being read.
 
 At a minimum you should check your patches with the patch style
-checker prior to submission (scripts/patchcheck.pl).  You should
+checker prior to submission (scripts/checkpatch.pl).  You should
 be able to justify all violations that remain in your patch.
 
 
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
   <http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=112112749912944&w=2>
 
 Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
-  <http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/source/Documentation/CodingStyle>
+  <http://users.sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/source/Documentation/CodingStyle>
 
 Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
   <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index 24c5aade8998..cbee3a27f768 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
                "IO    %15s%15s\n"
                "      %15llu%15llu\n"
                "MEM   %15s%15s\n"
-               "      %15llu%15llu\n"
+               "      %15llu%15llu\n",
                "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
                t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
                t->cpu_delay_total,
diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
index 8af392fc6ef0..dc3f49e3e539 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
@@ -477,9 +477,9 @@ With this multipage bio design:
   the same bi_io_vec array, but with the index and size accordingly modified)
 - A linked list of bios is used as before for unrelated merges (*) - this
   avoids reallocs and makes independent completions easier to handle.
-- Code that traverses the req list needs to make a distinction between
-  segments of a request (bio_for_each_segment) and the distinct completion
-  units/bios (rq_for_each_bio).
+- Code that traverses the req list can find all the segments of a bio
+  by using rq_for_each_segment.  This handles the fact that a request
+  has multiple bios, each of which can have multiple segments.
 - Drivers which can't process a large bio in one shot can use the bi_idx
   field to keep track of the next bio_vec entry to process.
   (e.g a 1MB bio_vec needs to be handled in max 128kB chunks for IDE)
@@ -664,14 +664,14 @@ in lvm or md.
 
 3.2.1 Traversing segments and completion units in a request
 
-The macros bio_for_each_segment() and rq_for_each_bio() should be used for
-traversing the bios in the request list (drivers should avoid directly
-trying to do it themselves). Using these helpers should also make it easier
-to cope with block changes in the future.
+The macro rq_for_each_segment() should be used for traversing the bios
+in the request list (drivers should avoid directly trying to do it
+themselves). Using these helpers should also make it easier to cope
+with block changes in the future.
 
-        rq_for_each_bio(bio, rq)
-                bio_for_each_segment(bio_vec, bio, i)
-                        /* bio_vec is now current segment */
+        struct req_iterator iter;
+        rq_for_each_segment(bio_vec, rq, iter)
+                /* bio_vec is now current segment */
 
 I/O completion callbacks are per-bio rather than per-segment, so drivers
 that traverse bio chains on completion need to keep that in mind. Drivers
diff --git a/Documentation/block/ioprio.txt b/Documentation/block/ioprio.txt
index 1b930ef5a079..35e516b0b8a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/ioprio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/ioprio.txt
@@ -86,8 +86,15 @@ extern int sys_ioprio_get(int, int);
 #error "Unsupported arch"
 #endif
 
-_syscall3(int, ioprio_set, int, which, int, who, int, ioprio);
-_syscall2(int, ioprio_get, int, which, int, who);
+static inline int ioprio_set(int which, int who, int ioprio)
+{
+        return syscall(__NR_ioprio_set, which, who, ioprio);
+}
+
+static inline int ioprio_get(int which, int who)
+{
+        return syscall(__NR_ioprio_get, which, who);
+}
 
 enum {
         IOPRIO_CLASS_NONE,
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c1e9545c59bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+                 Asynchronous Transfers/Transforms API
+
+1 INTRODUCTION
+
+2 GENEALOGY
+
+3 USAGE
+3.1 General format of the API
+3.2 Supported operations
+3.3 Descriptor management
+3.4 When does the operation execute?
+3.5 When does the operation complete?
+3.6 Constraints
+3.7 Example
+
+4 DRIVER DEVELOPER NOTES
+4.1 Conformance points
+4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
+
+5 SOURCE
+
+---
+
+1 INTRODUCTION
+
+The async_tx API provides methods for describing a chain of asynchronous
+bulk memory transfers/transforms with support for inter-transactional
+dependencies.  It is implemented as a dmaengine client that smooths over
+the details of different hardware offload engine implementations.  Code
+that is written to the API can optimize for asynchronous operation and
+the API will fit the chain of operations to the available offload
+resources.
+
+2 GENEALOGY
+
+The API was initially designed to offload the memory copy and
+xor-parity-calculations of the md-raid5 driver using the offload engines
+present in the Intel(R) Xscale series of I/O processors.  It also built
+on the 'dmaengine' layer developed for offloading memory copies in the
+network stack using Intel(R) I/OAT engines.  The following design
+features surfaced as a result:
+1/ implicit synchronous path: users of the API do not need to know if
+   the platform they are running on has offload capabilities.  The
+   operation will be offloaded when an engine is available and carried out
+   in software otherwise.
+2/ cross channel dependency chains: the API allows a chain of dependent
+   operations to be submitted, like xor->copy->xor in the raid5 case.  The
+   API automatically handles cases where the transition from one operation
+   to another implies a hardware channel switch.
+3/ dmaengine extensions to support multiple clients and operation types
+   beyond 'memcpy'
+
+3 USAGE
+
+3.1 General format of the API:
+struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *
+async_<operation>(<op specific parameters>,
+                  enum async_tx_flags flags,
+                  struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *dependency,
+                  dma_async_tx_callback callback_routine,
+                  void *callback_parameter);
+
+3.2 Supported operations:
+memcpy       - memory copy between a source and a destination buffer
+memset       - fill a destination buffer with a byte value
+xor          - xor a series of source buffers and write the result to a
+               destination buffer
+xor_zero_sum - xor a series of source buffers and set a flag if the
+               result is zero.  The implementation attempts to prevent
+               writes to memory
+
+3.3 Descriptor management:
+The return value is non-NULL and points to a 'descriptor' when the operation
+has been queued to execute asynchronously.  Descriptors are recycled
+resources, under control of the offload engine driver, to be reused as
+operations complete.  When an application needs to submit a chain of
+operations it must guarantee that the descriptor is not automatically recycled
+before the dependency is submitted.  This requires that all descriptors be
+acknowledged by the application before the offload engine driver is allowed to
+recycle (or free) the descriptor.  A descriptor can be acked by one of the
+following methods:
+1/ setting the ASYNC_TX_ACK flag if no child operations are to be submitted
+2/ setting the ASYNC_TX_DEP_ACK flag to acknowledge the parent
+   descriptor of a new operation.
+3/ calling async_tx_ack() on the descriptor.
+
+3.4 When does the operation execute?
+Operations do not immediately issue after return from the
+async_<operation> call.  Offload engine drivers batch operations to
+improve performance by reducing the number of mmio cycles needed to
+manage the channel.  Once a driver-specific threshold is met the driver
+automatically issues pending operations.  An application can force this
+event by calling async_tx_issue_pending_all().  This operates on all
+channels since the application has no knowledge of channel to operation
+mapping.
+
+3.5 When does the operation complete?
+There are two methods for an application to learn about the completion
+of an operation.
+1/ Call dma_wait_for_async_tx().  This call causes the CPU to spin while
+   it polls for the completion of the operation.  It handles dependency
+   chains and issuing pending operations.
+2/ Specify a completion callback.  The callback routine runs in tasklet
+   context if the offload engine driver supports interrupts, or it is
+   called in application context if the operation is carried out
+   synchronously in software.  The callback can be set in the call to
+   async_<operation>, or when the application needs to submit a chain of
+   unknown length it can use the async_trigger_callback() routine to set a
+   completion interrupt/callback at the end of the chain.
+
+3.6 Constraints:
+1/ Calls to async_<operation> are not permitted in IRQ context.  Other
+   contexts are permitted provided constraint #2 is not violated.
+2/ Completion callback routines cannot submit new operations.  This
+   results in recursion in the synchronous case and spin_locks being
+   acquired twice in the asynchronous case.
+
+3.7 Example:
+Perform a xor->copy->xor operation where each operation depends on the
+result from the previous operation:
+
+void complete_xor_copy_xor(void *param)
+{
+        printk("complete\n");
+}
+
+int run_xor_copy_xor(struct page **xor_srcs,
+                     int xor_src_cnt,
+                     struct page *xor_dest,
+                     size_t xor_len,
+                     struct page *copy_src,
+                     struct page *copy_dest,
+                     size_t copy_len)
+{
+        struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *tx;
+
+        tx = async_xor(xor_dest, xor_srcs, 0, xor_src_cnt, xor_len,
+                       ASYNC_TX_XOR_DROP_DST, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+        tx = async_memcpy(copy_dest, copy_src, 0, 0, copy_len,
+                          ASYNC_TX_DEP_ACK, tx, NULL, NULL);
+        tx = async_xor(xor_dest, xor_srcs, 0, xor_src_cnt, xor_len,
+                       ASYNC_TX_XOR_DROP_DST | ASYNC_TX_DEP_ACK | ASYNC_TX_ACK,
+                       tx, complete_xor_copy_xor, NULL);
+
+        async_tx_issue_pending_all();
+}
+
+See include/linux/async_tx.h for more information on the flags.  See the
+ops_run_* and ops_complete_* routines in drivers/md/raid5.c for more
+implementation examples.
+
+4 DRIVER DEVELOPMENT NOTES
+4.1 Conformance points:
+There are a few conformance points required in dmaengine drivers to
+accommodate assumptions made by applications using the async_tx API:
+1/ Completion callbacks are expected to happen in tasklet context
+2/ dma_async_tx_descriptor fields are never manipulated in IRQ context
+3/ Use async_tx_run_dependencies() in the descriptor clean up path to
+   handle submission of dependent operations
+
+4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
+This requirement seems to arise from cases where a DMA engine driver is
+trying to support device-to-memory DMA.  The dmaengine and async_tx
+implementations were designed for offloading memory-to-memory
+operations; however, there are some capabilities of the dmaengine layer
+that can be used for platform-specific channel management.
+Platform-specific constraints can be handled by registering the
+application as a 'dma_client' and implementing a 'dma_event_callback' to
+apply a filter to the available channels in the system.  Before showing
+how to implement a custom dma_event callback some background of
+dmaengine's client support is required.
+
+The following routines in dmaengine support multiple clients requesting
+use of a channel:
+- dma_async_client_register(struct dma_client *client)
+- dma_async_client_chan_request(struct dma_client *client)
+
+dma_async_client_register takes a pointer to an initialized dma_client
+structure.  It expects that the 'event_callback' and 'cap_mask' fields
+are already initialized.
+
+dma_async_client_chan_request triggers dmaengine to notify the client of
+all channels that satisfy the capability mask.  It is up to the client's
+event_callback routine to track how many channels the client needs and
+how many it is currently using.  The dma_event_callback routine returns a
+dma_state_client code to let dmaengine know the status of the
+allocation.
+
+Below is the example of how to extend this functionality for
+platform-specific filtering of the available channels beyond the
+standard capability mask:
+
+static enum dma_state_client
+my_dma_client_callback(struct dma_client *client,
+                        struct dma_chan *chan, enum dma_state state)
+{
+        struct dma_device *dma_dev;
+        struct my_platform_specific_dma *plat_dma_dev;
+        
+        dma_dev = chan->device;
+        plat_dma_dev = container_of(dma_dev,
+                                    struct my_platform_specific_dma,
+                                    dma_dev);
+
+        if (!plat_dma_dev->platform_specific_capability)
+                return DMA_DUP;
+
+        . . .
+}
+
+5 SOURCE
+include/linux/dmaengine.h: core header file for DMA drivers and clients
+drivers/dma/dmaengine.c: offload engine channel management routines
+drivers/dma/: location for offload engine drivers
+include/linux/async_tx.h: core header file for the async_tx api
+crypto/async_tx/async_tx.c: async_tx interface to dmaengine and common code
+crypto/async_tx/async_memcpy.c: copy offload
+crypto/async_tx/async_memset.c: memory fill offload
+crypto/async_tx/async_xor.c: xor and xor zero sum offload
diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt
index 8de132a02ba9..6c46730c631a 100644
--- a/Documentation/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devices.txt
@@ -94,6 +94,8 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
                   9 = /dev/urandom      Faster, less secure random number gen.
                  10 = /dev/aio          Asynchronous I/O notification interface
                  11 = /dev/kmsg         Writes to this come out as printk's
+                 12 = /dev/oldmem       Used by crashdump kernels to access
+                                        the memory of the kernel that crashed.
 
   1 block       RAM disk
                   0 = /dev/ram0         First RAM disk
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt
index dbcedf5833ee..2511a335abd6 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Some very frequently asked questions about linuxtv-dvb
         - saa7146_vv: SAA7146 video and vbi functions. These are only needed
           for full-featured cards.
 
-        - video-buf: capture helper module for the saa7146_vv driver. This
+        - videobuf-dma-sg: capture helper module for the saa7146_vv driver. This
           one is responsible to handle capture buffers.
 
         - dvb-ttpci: The main driver for AV7110 based, full-featured
diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
index b4d306ae9234..f2e908d7f90d 100644
--- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
+++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware
@@ -111,21 +111,21 @@ sub tda10045 {
 }
 
 sub tda10046 {
-    my $sourcefile = "tt_budget_217g.zip";
-    my $url = "http://www.technotrend.de/new/217g/$sourcefile";
-    my $hash = "6a7e1e2f2644b162ff0502367553c72d";
-    my $outfile = "dvb-fe-tda10046.fw";
-    my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1);
+        my $sourcefile = "TT_PCI_2.19h_28_11_2006.zip";
+        my $url = "http://technotrend-online.com/download/software/219/$sourcefile";
+        my $hash = "6a7e1e2f2644b162ff0502367553c72d";
+        my $outfile = "dvb-fe-tda10046.fw";
+        my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1);
 
-    checkstandard();
+        checkstandard();
 
-    wgetfile($sourcefile, $url);
-    unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir);
-    extract("$tmpdir/software/OEM/PCI/App/ttlcdacc.dll", 0x3f731, 24478, "$tmpdir/fwtmp");
-    verify("$tmpdir/fwtmp", $hash);
-    copy("$tmpdir/fwtmp", $outfile);
+        wgetfile($sourcefile, $url);
+        unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir);
+        extract("$tmpdir/TT_PCI_2.19h_28_11_2006/software/OEM/PCI/App/ttlcdacc.dll", 0x65389, 24478, "$tmpdir/fwtmp");
+        verify("$tmpdir/fwtmp", $hash);
+        copy("$tmpdir/fwtmp", $outfile);
 
-    $outfile;
+        $outfile;
 }
 
 sub tda10046lifeview {
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index a43d2878a4ef..63df2262d41a 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -197,6 +197,14 @@ Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:   /proc/acpi/event
+When:   February 2008
+Why:    /proc/acpi/event has been replaced by events via the input layer
+        and netlink since 2.6.23.
+Who:    Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:   Compaq touchscreen device emulation
 When:   Oct 2007
 Files:  drivers/input/tsdev.c
@@ -290,3 +298,32 @@ Why:	All mthca hardware also supports MSI-X, which provides
 Who:    Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com>
 
 ---------------------------
+
+What:   sk98lin network driver
+When:   Feburary 2008
+Why:    In kernel tree version of driver is unmaintained. Sk98lin driver
+        replaced by the skge driver. 
+Who:    Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@linux-foundation.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:   i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks
+When:   April 2008
+
+Why:    The i386/x86_64 merge provides a symlink to the old bzImage
+        location so not yet updated user space tools, e.g. package
+        scripts, do not break.
+Who:    Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:   shaper network driver
+When:   January 2008
+Files:  drivers/net/shaper.c, include/linux/if_shaper.h
+Why:    This driver has been marked obsolete for many years.
+        It was only designed to work on lower speed links and has design
+        flaws that lead to machine crashes. The qdisc infrastructure in
+        2.4 or later kernels, provides richer features and is more robust.
+Who:    Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@linux-foundation.org>
+
+---------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
index 571785887a4f..59db1bca7027 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
@@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ directory-locking
         - info about the locking scheme used for directory operations.
 dlmfs.txt
         - info on the userspace interface to the OCFS2 DLM.
+ecryptfs.txt
+        - docs on eCryptfs: stacked cryptographic filesystem for Linux.
 ext2.txt
         - info, mount options and specifications for the Ext2 filesystem.
 ext3.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt
index bbd8b28c13de..cda6905cbe49 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt
@@ -6,12 +6,26 @@ ABOUT
 
 v9fs is a Unix implementation of the Plan 9 9p remote filesystem protocol.
 
-This software was originally developed by Ron Minnich <rminnich@lanl.gov>
-and Maya Gokhale <maya@lanl.gov>.  Additional development by Greg Watson
+This software was originally developed by Ron Minnich <rminnich@sandia.gov>
+and Maya Gokhale.  Additional development by Greg Watson
 <gwatson@lanl.gov> and most recently Eric Van Hensbergen
 <ericvh@gmail.com>, Latchesar Ionkov <lucho@ionkov.net> and Russ Cox
 <rsc@swtch.com>.
 
+The best detailed explanation of the Linux implementation and applications of
+the 9p client is available in the form of a USENIX paper:
+   http://www.usenix.org/events/usenix05/tech/freenix/hensbergen.html
+
+Other applications are described in the following papers:
+        * XCPU & Clustering
+                http://www.xcpu.org/xcpu-talk.pdf
+        * KVMFS: control file system for KVM
+                http://www.xcpu.org/kvmfs.pdf
+        * CellFS: A New ProgrammingModel for the Cell BE
+                http://www.xcpu.org/cellfs-talk.pdf
+        * PROSE I/O: Using 9p to enable Application Partitions
+                http://plan9.escet.urjc.es/iwp9/cready/PROSE_iwp9_2006.pdf
+
 USAGE
 =====
 
@@ -90,9 +104,9 @@ subset of the namespace by extending the path: '#U*'/tmp would just export
 and export.
 
 A Linux version of the 9p server is now maintained under the npfs project
-on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/npfs).  There is also a
-more stable single-threaded version of the server (named spfs) available from
-the same CVS repository.
+on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/npfs).  The currently
+maintained version is the single-threaded version of the server (named spfs)
+available from the same CVS repository.
 
 There are user and developer mailing lists available through the v9fs project
 on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/v9fs).
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
index 8ee10ec88293..e79ee2db183a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ raiddev /dev/md0
         device          /dev/hda5
         raid-disk       0
         device          /dev/hdb1
-        raid-disl       1
+        raid-disk       1
 
 For linear raid, just change the raid-level above to "raid-level linear", for
 mirrors, change it to "raid-level 1", and for stripe sets with parity, change
@@ -457,6 +457,8 @@ ChangeLog
 
 Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog.
 
+2.1.29:
+        - Fix a deadlock when mounting read-write.
 2.1.28:
         - Fix a deadlock.
 2.1.27:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
index 8ccf0c1b58ed..ed55238023a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
@@ -28,11 +28,7 @@ Manish Singh  <manish.singh@oracle.com>
 Caveats
 =======
 Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
-        - sparse files
         - extended attributes
-        - shared writable mmap
-        - loopback is supported, but data written will not
-          be cluster coherent.
         - quotas
         - cluster aware flock
         - cluster aware lockf
@@ -57,3 +53,12 @@ nointr			Do not allow signals to interrupt cluster
 atime_quantum=60(*)     OCFS2 will not update atime unless this number
                         of seconds has passed since the last update.
                         Set to zero to always update atime.
+data=ordered    (*)     All data are forced directly out to the main file
+                        system prior to its metadata being committed to the
+                        journal.
+data=writeback          Data ordering is not preserved, data may be written
+                        into the main file system after its metadata has been
+                        committed to the journal.
+preferred_slot=0(*)     During mount, try to use this filesystem slot first. If
+                        it is in use by another node, the first empty one found
+                        will be chosen. Invalid values will be ignored.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
index 870cda9416e9..170bf862437b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Kernel driver coretemp
 Supported chips:
   * All Intel Core family
     Prefix: 'coretemp'
-    CPUID: family 0x6, models 0xe, 0xf
+    CPUID: family 0x6, models 0xe, 0xf, 0x16
     Datasheet: Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual
                Volume 3A: System Programming Guide
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
index 1a0f3d64ab80..8f446070e64a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737
@@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'dme1737'
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
     Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA
+  * SMSC SCH3112, SCH3114, SCH3116
+    Prefix: 'sch311x'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space
+    Datasheet: http://www.nuhorizons.com/FeaturedProducts/Volume1/SMSC/311x.pdf
 
 Authors:
     Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com>
@@ -27,16 +31,25 @@ Description
 -----------
 
 This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the
-SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) Super-I/O chips. This chip
-features monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1
-internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and 6 fan speeds
-fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chip implements 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for
-controlling fan speeds both manually and automatically.
-
-Fan[3-6] and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability is
-dependent on the configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which
-features are present during initialization and create the sysfs attributes
-accordingly.
+SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) and SMSC SCH311x Super-I/O
+chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote
+diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and up
+to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM
+outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and
+automatically.
+
+For the DME1737 and A8000, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. Fan[3-6]
+and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on the
+configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are present
+during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly.
+
+For the SCH311x, fan[1-3] and pwm[1-3] are always present and fan[4-6] and
+pwm[5-6] don't exist.
+
+The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737 and A8000 are only accessible
+via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. The driver
+will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects a DME1737
+or A8000 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x chip.
 
 
 Voltage Monitoring
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f b/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f
index 94e0d2cbd3d2..f0d55976740a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71805f
@@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Prefix: 'f71805f'
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
     Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+  * Fintek F71806F/FG
+    Prefix: 'f71872f'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
   * Fintek F71872F/FG
     Prefix: 'f71872f'
     Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
@@ -38,6 +42,9 @@ The Fintek F71872F/FG Super I/O chip is almost the same, with two
 additional internal voltages monitored (VSB and battery). It also features
 6 VID inputs. The VID inputs are not yet supported by this driver.
 
+The Fintek F71806F/FG Super-I/O chip is essentially the same as the
+F71872F/FG, and is undistinguishable therefrom.
+
 The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, which seems
 reasonable.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index 81ecc7e41c50..5b704a40256b 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -90,7 +90,8 @@ upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you
 can't have both on a given board.
 
 The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
-2 additional fans. They are not yet supported by the driver.
+2 additional fans. They are supported by the driver for the IT8716F and
+IT8718F but not for the IT8712F
 
 The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional
 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78
index fd5dc7a19f0e..dfc318a60fd4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm78
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm78
@@ -56,16 +56,6 @@ should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself.
 It is a value in volts. When it is unconnected, you will often find the
 value 3.50 V here.
 
-In addition to the alarms described above, there are a couple of additional
-ones. There is a BTI alarm, which gets triggered when an external chip has
-crossed its limits. Usually, this is connected to all LM75 chips; if at
-least one crosses its limits, this bit gets set. The CHAS alarm triggers
-if your computer case is open. The FIFO alarms should never trigger; it
-indicates an internal error. The SMI_IN alarm indicates some other chip
-has triggered an SMI interrupt. As we do not use SMI interrupts at all,
-this condition usually indicates there is a problem with some other
-device.
-
 If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
 is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
 already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93
index 4e4a1dc1d2da..ac711f357faf 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c-0x2e
     Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM93.pdf
 
-Author:
+Authors:
         Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
         Ported to 2.6 by Eric J. Bowersox <ericb@aspsys.com>
         Adapted to 2.6.20 by Carsten Emde <ce@osadl.org>
@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Author:
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-(specific to LM93)
 * init: integer
   Set to non-zero to force some initializations (default is 0).
 * disable_block: integer
@@ -37,30 +36,13 @@ Module Parameters
   I.e. this parameter controls the VID pin input thresholds; if your VID
   inputs are not working, try changing this.  The default value is "0".
 
-(common among sensor drivers)
-* force: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,address pairs to assume to be present.  Autodetection
-  of the target device will still be attempted.  Use one of the more
-  specific force directives below if this doesn't detect the device.
-* force_lm93: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,address pairs which are unquestionably assumed to contain
-  a 'lm93' chip
-* ignore: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,address pairs not to scan
-* ignore_range: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,start-addr,end-addr triples not to scan
-* probe: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,address pairs to scan additionally
-* probe_range: short array (min = 1, max = 48)
-  List of adapter,start-addr,end-addr triples to scan additionally
-
 
 Hardware Description
 --------------------
 
 (from the datasheet)
 
-The LM93, hardware monitor, has a two wire digital interface compatible with
+The LM93 hardware monitor has a two wire digital interface compatible with
 SMBus 2.0. Using an 8-bit ADC, the LM93 measures the temperature of two remote
 diode connected transistors as well as its own die and 16 power supply
 voltages. To set fan speed, the LM93 has two PWM outputs that are each
@@ -69,18 +51,12 @@ table based. The LM93 includes a digital filter that can be invoked to smooth
 temperature readings for better control of fan speed. The LM93 has four
 tachometer inputs to measure fan speed. Limit and status registers for all
 measured values are included. The LM93 builds upon the functionality of
-previous motherboard management ASICs and uses some of the LM85 s features
+previous motherboard management ASICs and uses some of the LM85's features
 (i.e. smart tachometer mode). It also adds measurement and control support
 for dynamic Vccp monitoring and PROCHOT. It is designed to monitor a dual
 processor Xeon class motherboard with a minimum of external components.
 
 
-Driver Description
-------------------
-
-This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM93.
-
-
 User Interface
 --------------
 
@@ -101,7 +77,7 @@ These intervals can be found in the sysfs files prochot1_interval and
 prochot2_interval.  The values in these files specify the intervals for
 #P1_PROCHOT and #P2_PROCHOT, respectively.  Selecting a value not in this
 list will cause the driver to use the next largest interval.  The available
-intervals are:
+intervals are (in seconds):
 
 #PROCHOT intervals: 0.73, 1.46, 2.9, 5.8, 11.7, 23.3, 46.6, 93.2, 186, 372
 
@@ -111,12 +87,12 @@ assert #P2_PROCHOT, and vice-versa.  This mode is enabled by writing a
 non-zero integer to the sysfs file prochot_short.
 
 The LM93 can also override the #PROCHOT pins by driving a PWM signal onto
-one or both of them.  When overridden, the signal has a period of 3.56 mS,
+one or both of them.  When overridden, the signal has a period of 3.56 ms,
 a minimum pulse width of 5 clocks (at 22.5kHz => 6.25% duty cycle), and
 a maximum pulse width of 80 clocks (at 22.5kHz => 99.88% duty cycle).
 
 The sysfs files prochot1_override and prochot2_override contain boolean
-intgers which enable or disable the override function for #P1_PROCHOT and
+integers which enable or disable the override function for #P1_PROCHOT and
 #P2_PROCHOT, respectively.  The sysfs file prochot_override_duty_cycle
 contains a value controlling the duty cycle for the PWM signal used when
 the override function is enabled.  This value ranges from 0 to 15, with 0
@@ -166,7 +142,7 @@ frequency values are constrained by the hardware.  Selecting a value which is
 not available will cause the driver to use the next largest value.  Also note
 that this parameter has implications for the Smart Tach Mode (see above).
 
-PWM Output Frequencies: 12, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 22500 (h/w default)
+PWM Output Frequencies (in Hz): 12, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 22500 (default)
 
 Automatic PWM:
 
@@ -178,7 +154,7 @@ individual control sources to which the PWM output is bound.
 The eight control sources are: temp1-temp4 (aka "zones" in the datasheet),
 #PROCHOT 1 & 2, and #VRDHOT 1 & 2.  The bindings are expressed as a bitmask
 in the sysfs files pwm<n>_auto_channels, where a "1" enables the binding, and
- a "0" disables it. The h/w default is 0x0f (all temperatures bound).
+a "0" disables it. The h/w default is 0x0f (all temperatures bound).
 
         0x01 - Temp 1
         0x02 - Temp 2
@@ -324,89 +300,3 @@ LM93 Unique sysfs Files
 
         gpio                    input state of 8 GPIO pins; read-only
 
-
-Sample Configuration File
--------------------------
-
-Here is a sample LM93 chip config for sensors.conf:
-
----------- cut here ----------
-chip "lm93-*"
-
-# VOLTAGE INPUTS
-
-        # labels and scaling based on datasheet recommendations
-        label in1       "+12V1"
-        compute in1     @ * 12.945, @ / 12.945
-        set in1_min     12 * 0.90
-        set in1_max     12 * 1.10
-
-        label in2       "+12V2"
-        compute in2     @ * 12.945, @ / 12.945
-        set in2_min     12 * 0.90
-        set in2_max     12 * 1.10
-
-        label in3       "+12V3"
-        compute in3     @ * 12.945, @ / 12.945
-        set in3_min     12 * 0.90
-        set in3_max     12 * 1.10
-
-        label in4       "FSB_Vtt"
-
-        label in5       "3GIO"
-
-        label in6       "ICH_Core"
-
-        label in7       "Vccp1"
-
-        label in8       "Vccp2"
-
-        label in9       "+3.3V"
-        set in9_min     3.3 * 0.90
-        set in9_max     3.3 * 1.10
-
-        label in10      "+5V"
-        set in10_min    5.0 * 0.90
-        set in10_max    5.0 * 1.10
-
-        label in11      "SCSI_Core"
-
-        label in12      "Mem_Core"
-
-        label in13      "Mem_Vtt"
-
-        label in14      "Gbit_Core"
-
-        # Assuming R1/R2 = 4.1143, and 3.3V reference
-        # -12V = (4.1143 + 1) * (@ - 3.3) + 3.3
-        label in15      "-12V"
-        compute in15 @ * 5.1143 - 13.57719, (@ + 13.57719) / 5.1143
-        set in15_min    -12 * 0.90
-        set in15_max    -12 * 1.10
-
-        label in16      "+3.3VSB"
-        set in16_min    3.3 * 0.90
-        set in16_max    3.3 * 1.10
-
-# TEMPERATURE INPUTS
-
-        label temp1     "CPU1"
-        label temp2     "CPU2"
-        label temp3     "LM93"
-
-# TACHOMETER INPUTS
-
-        label fan1      "Fan1"
-        set fan1_min    3000
-        label fan2      "Fan2"
-        set fan2_min    3000
-        label fan3      "Fan3"
-        set fan3_min    3000
-        label fan4      "Fan4"
-        set fan4_min    3000
-
-# PWM OUTPUTS
-
-        label pwm1      "CPU1"
-        label pwm2      "CPU2"
-
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
index b3a9e1b9dbda..a17b692d2679 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
@@ -67,6 +67,10 @@ between readings to be caught and alarmed. The exact definition of an
 alarm (for example, whether a threshold must be met or must be exceeded
 to cause an alarm) is chip-dependent.
 
+When setting values of hwmon sysfs attributes, the string representation of
+the desired value must be written, note that strings which are not a number
+are interpreted as 0! For more on how written strings are interpreted see the
+"sysfs attribute writes interpretation" section at the end of this file.
 
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
@@ -78,8 +82,21 @@ RW	read/write value
 Read/write values may be read-only for some chips, depending on the
 hardware implementation.
 
-All entries are optional, and should only be created in a given driver
-if the chip has the feature.
+All entries (except name) are optional, and should only be created in a
+given driver if the chip has the feature.
+
+
+********
+* Name *
+********
+
+name            The chip name.
+                This should be a short, lowercase string, not containing
+                spaces nor dashes, representing the chip name. This is
+                the only mandatory attribute.
+                I2C devices get this attribute created automatically.
+                RO
+
 
 ************
 * Voltages *
@@ -104,18 +121,17 @@ in[0-*]_input	Voltage input value.
                 by the chip driver, and must be done by the application.
                 However, some drivers (notably lm87 and via686a)
                 do scale, because of internal resistors built into a chip.
-                These drivers will output the actual voltage.
-
-                Typical usage:
-                        in0_*   CPU #1 voltage (not scaled)
-                        in1_*   CPU #2 voltage (not scaled)
-                        in2_*   3.3V nominal (not scaled)
-                        in3_*   5.0V nominal (scaled)
-                        in4_*   12.0V nominal (scaled)
-                        in5_*   -12.0V nominal (scaled)
-                        in6_*   -5.0V nominal (scaled)
-                        in7_*   varies
-                        in8_*   varies
+                These drivers will output the actual voltage. Rule of
+                thumb: drivers should report the voltage values at the
+                "pins" of the chip.
+
+in[0-*]_label   Suggested voltage channel label.
+                Text string
+                Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
+                this voltage channel is being used for, and user-space
+                doesn't. In all other cases, the label is provided by
+                user-space.
+                RO
 
 cpu[0-*]_vid    CPU core reference voltage.
                 Unit: millivolt
@@ -159,6 +175,13 @@ fan[1-*]_target
                 Only makes sense if the chip supports closed-loop fan speed
                 control based on the measured fan speed.
 
+fan[1-*]_label  Suggested fan channel label.
+                Text string
+                Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
+                this fan channel is being used for, and user-space doesn't.
+                In all other cases, the label is provided by user-space.
+                RO
+
 Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with fans.
 
 
@@ -219,12 +242,12 @@ temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
 ****************
 
 temp[1-*]_type  Sensor type selection.
-                Integers 1 to 6 or thermistor Beta value (typically 3435)
+                Integers 1 to 6
                 RW
                 1: PII/Celeron Diode
                 2: 3904 transistor
                 3: thermal diode
-                4: thermistor (default/unknown Beta)
+                4: thermistor
                 5: AMD AMDSI
                 6: Intel PECI
                 Not all types are supported by all chips
@@ -260,18 +283,19 @@ temp[1-*]_crit_hyst
                 from the critical value.
                 RW
 
-temp[1-4]_offset
+temp[1-*]_offset
                 Temperature offset which is added to the temperature reading
                 by the chip.
                 Unit: millidegree Celsius
                 Read/Write value.
 
-                If there are multiple temperature sensors, temp1_* is
-                generally the sensor inside the chip itself,
-                reported as "motherboard temperature".  temp2_* to
-                temp4_* are generally sensors external to the chip
-                itself, for example the thermal diode inside the CPU or
-                a thermistor nearby.
+temp[1-*]_label Suggested temperature channel label.
+                Text string
+                Should only be created if the driver has hints about what
+                this temperature channel is being used for, and user-space
+                doesn't. In all other cases, the label is provided by
+                user-space.
+                RO
 
 Some chips measure temperature using external thermistors and an ADC, and
 report the temperature measurement as a voltage. Converting this voltage
@@ -393,14 +417,53 @@ beep_mask	Bitmask for beep.
                 RW
 
 
-*********
-* Other *
-*********
-
-eeprom          Raw EEPROM data in binary form.
-                RO
-
-pec             Enable or disable PEC (SMBus only)
-                0: disable
-                1: enable
-                RW
+sysfs attribute writes interpretation
+-------------------------------------
+
+hwmon sysfs attributes always contain numbers, so the first thing to do is to
+convert the input to a number, there are 2 ways todo this depending whether
+the number can be negative or not:
+unsigned long u = simple_strtoul(buf, NULL, 10);
+long s = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10);
+
+With buf being the buffer with the user input being passed by the kernel.
+Notice that we do not use the second argument of strto[u]l, and thus cannot
+tell when 0 is returned, if this was really 0 or is caused by invalid input.
+This is done deliberately as checking this everywhere would add a lot of
+code to the kernel.
+
+Notice that it is important to always store the converted value in an
+unsigned long or long, so that no wrap around can happen before any further
+checking.
+
+After the input string is converted to an (unsigned) long, the value should be
+checked if its acceptable. Be careful with further conversions on the value
+before checking it for validity, as these conversions could still cause a wrap
+around before the check. For example do not multiply the result, and only
+add/subtract if it has been divided before the add/subtract.
+
+What to do if a value is found to be invalid, depends on the type of the
+sysfs attribute that is being set. If it is a continuous setting like a
+tempX_max or inX_max attribute, then the value should be clamped to its
+limits using SENSORS_LIMIT(value, min_limit, max_limit). If it is not
+continuous like for example a tempX_type, then when an invalid value is
+written, -EINVAL should be returned.
+
+Example1, temp1_max, register is a signed 8 bit value (-128 - 127 degrees):
+
+        long v = simple_strtol(buf, NULL, 10) / 1000;
+        v = SENSORS_LIMIT(v, -128, 127);
+        /* write v to register */
+
+Example2, fan divider setting, valid values 2, 4 and 8:
+
+        unsigned long v = simple_strtoul(buf, NULL, 10);
+
+        switch (v) {
+        case 2: v = 1; break;
+        case 4: v = 2; break;
+        case 8: v = 3; break;
+        default:
+                return -EINVAL;
+        }
+        /* write v to register */
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
index db9881df88a5..f153b2f6d62c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d
@@ -75,46 +75,64 @@ Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
 An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
 or maximum limit.
 
-The bit ordering for the alarm "realtime status register" and the
-"beep enable registers" are different.
-
-in0 (VCORE)  :  alarms: 0x000001 beep_enable: 0x000001
-in1 (VINR0)  :  alarms: 0x000002 beep_enable: 0x002000 <== mismatch
-in2 (+3.3VIN):  alarms: 0x000004 beep_enable: 0x000004
-in3 (5VDD)   :  alarms: 0x000008 beep_enable: 0x000008
-in4 (+12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000100 beep_enable: 0x000100
-in5 (-12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000200 beep_enable: 0x000200
-in6 (-5VIN)  :  alarms: 0x000400 beep_enable: 0x000400
-in7 (VSB)    :  alarms: 0x080000 beep_enable: 0x010000 <== mismatch
-in8 (VBAT)   :  alarms: 0x100000 beep_enable: 0x020000 <== mismatch
-in9 (VINR1)  :  alarms: 0x004000 beep_enable: 0x004000
-temp1        :  alarms: 0x000010 beep_enable: 0x000010
-temp2        :  alarms: 0x000020 beep_enable: 0x000020
-temp3        :  alarms: 0x002000 beep_enable: 0x000002 <== mismatch
-fan1         :  alarms: 0x000040 beep_enable: 0x000040
-fan2         :  alarms: 0x000080 beep_enable: 0x000080
-fan3         :  alarms: 0x000800 beep_enable: 0x000800
-fan4         :  alarms: 0x200000 beep_enable: 0x200000
-fan5         :  alarms: 0x400000 beep_enable: 0x400000
-tart1        :  alarms: 0x010000 beep_enable: 0x040000 <== mismatch
-tart2        :  alarms: 0x020000 beep_enable: 0x080000 <== mismatch
-tart3        :  alarms: 0x040000 beep_enable: 0x100000 <== mismatch
-case_open    :  alarms: 0x001000 beep_enable: 0x001000
-user_enable  :  alarms: -------- beep_enable: 0x800000
-
-*** NOTE: It is the responsibility of user-space code to handle the fact
-that the beep enable and alarm bits are in different positions when using that
-feature of the chip.
-
-When an alarm goes off, you can be warned by a beeping signal through your
-computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, or only
-the beeping for some alarms.
-
-The driver only reads the chip values each 3 seconds; reading them more
-often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+The w83791d has a global bit used to enable beeping from the speaker when an
+alarm is triggered as well as a bitmask to enable or disable the beep for
+specific alarms. You need both the global beep enable bit and the
+corresponding beep bit to be on for a triggered alarm to sound a beep.
+
+The sysfs interface to the gloabal enable is via the sysfs beep_enable file.
+This file is used for both legacy and new code.
+
+The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy
+method of a single sysfs beep_mask file to a newer method using multiple
+*_beep files as described in .../Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface.
+
+A similar change has occured for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The
+original legacy method used a single sysfs alarms file containing a bitmap
+of triggered alarms. The newer method uses multiple sysfs *_alarm files
+(again following the pattern described in sysfs-interface).
+
+Since both methods read and write the underlying hardware, they can be used
+interchangeably and changes in one will automatically be reflected by
+the other. If you use the legacy bitmask method, your user-space code is
+responsible for handling the fact that the alarms and beep_mask bitmaps
+are not the same (see the table below).
+
+NOTE: All new code should be written to use the newer sysfs-interface
+specification as that avoids bitmap problems and is the preferred interface
+going forward.
+
+The driver reads the hardware chip values at most once every three seconds.
+User mode code requesting values more often will receive cached values.
+
+Alarms bitmap vs. beep_mask bitmask
+------------------------------------
+For legacy code using the alarms and beep_mask files:
+
+in0 (VCORE)  :  alarms: 0x000001 beep_mask: 0x000001
+in1 (VINR0)  :  alarms: 0x000002 beep_mask: 0x002000 <== mismatch
+in2 (+3.3VIN):  alarms: 0x000004 beep_mask: 0x000004
+in3 (5VDD)   :  alarms: 0x000008 beep_mask: 0x000008
+in4 (+12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000100 beep_mask: 0x000100
+in5 (-12VIN) :  alarms: 0x000200 beep_mask: 0x000200
+in6 (-5VIN)  :  alarms: 0x000400 beep_mask: 0x000400
+in7 (VSB)    :  alarms: 0x080000 beep_mask: 0x010000 <== mismatch
+in8 (VBAT)   :  alarms: 0x100000 beep_mask: 0x020000 <== mismatch
+in9 (VINR1)  :  alarms: 0x004000 beep_mask: 0x004000
+temp1        :  alarms: 0x000010 beep_mask: 0x000010
+temp2        :  alarms: 0x000020 beep_mask: 0x000020
+temp3        :  alarms: 0x002000 beep_mask: 0x000002 <== mismatch
+fan1         :  alarms: 0x000040 beep_mask: 0x000040
+fan2         :  alarms: 0x000080 beep_mask: 0x000080
+fan3         :  alarms: 0x000800 beep_mask: 0x000800
+fan4         :  alarms: 0x200000 beep_mask: 0x200000
+fan5         :  alarms: 0x400000 beep_mask: 0x400000
+tart1        :  alarms: 0x010000 beep_mask: 0x040000 <== mismatch
+tart2        :  alarms: 0x020000 beep_mask: 0x080000 <== mismatch
+tart3        :  alarms: 0x040000 beep_mask: 0x100000 <== mismatch
+case_open    :  alarms: 0x001000 beep_mask: 0x001000
+global_enable:  alarms: -------- beep_mask: 0x800000 (modified via beep_enable)
 
 W83791D TODO:
 ---------------
-Provide a patch for per-file alarms and beep enables as defined in the hwmon
-        documentation (Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface)
 Provide a patch for smart-fan control (still need appropriate motherboard/fans)
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
index fe6406f2f9a6..fde4420e3f75 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
@@ -13,7 +13,8 @@ Supported adapters:
   * Intel 631xESB/632xESB (ESB2)
   * Intel 82801H (ICH8)
   * Intel ICH9
-    Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
+  * Intel Tolapai
+   Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
 
 Authors: 
         Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, 
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
index fa0c786a8bf5..cf6b6cb02aa1 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Supported adapters:
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Intel website
   * ServerWorks OSB4, CSB5, CSB6 and HT-1000 southbridges
     Datasheet: Only available via NDA from ServerWorks
-  * ATI IXP200, IXP300, IXP400, SB600 and SB700 southbridges
+  * ATI IXP200, IXP300, IXP400, SB600, SB700 and SB800 southbridges
     Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * Standard Microsystems (SMSC) SLC90E66 (Victory66) southbridge
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the SMSC website http://www.smsc.com
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574
index 2752c8ce3167..5c1ad1376b62 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574
@@ -62,8 +62,6 @@ if the corresponding output is set as 1, otherwise the current output
 value, that is to say 0.
 
 The write file is read/write. Writing a value outputs it on the I/O
-port. Reading returns the last written value.
-
-On module initialization the chip is configured as eight inputs (all
-outputs to 1), so you can connect any circuit to the PCF8574(A) without
-being afraid of short-circuit.
+port. Reading returns the last written value. As it is not possible
+to read this value from the chip, you need to write at least once to
+this file before you can read back from it.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
index b849ad636583..9dd79123ddd9 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/dev-interface
@@ -90,12 +90,15 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,long addr)
 
 ioctl(file,I2C_TENBIT,long select)
   Selects ten bit addresses if select not equals 0, selects normal 7 bit
-  addresses if select equals 0. Default 0.
+  addresses if select equals 0. Default 0.  This request is only valid
+  if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_10BIT_ADDR.
 
 ioctl(file,I2C_PEC,long select)
   Selects SMBus PEC (packet error checking) generation and verification
   if select not equals 0, disables if select equals 0. Default 0.
-  Used only for SMBus transactions.
+  Used only for SMBus transactions.  This request only has an effect if the
+  the adapter has I2C_FUNC_SMBUS_PEC; it is still safe if not, it just
+  doesn't have any effect.
 
 ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs)
   Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs.
@@ -103,8 +106,10 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs)
 ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
 
   Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between.
-  The argument is a pointer to a struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data {
+  Only valid if the adapter has I2C_FUNC_I2C.  The argument is
+  a pointer to a
 
+  struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data {
       struct i2c_msg *msgs;  /* ptr to array of simple messages */
       int nmsgs;             /* number of messages to exchange */
   }
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/i2c-stub b/Documentation/i2c/i2c-stub
index 9cc081e69764..89e69ad3436c 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/i2c-stub
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/i2c-stub
@@ -6,13 +6,14 @@ This module is a very simple fake I2C/SMBus driver.  It implements four
 types of SMBus commands: write quick, (r/w) byte, (r/w) byte data, and
 (r/w) word data.
 
-You need to provide a chip address as a module parameter when loading
-this driver, which will then only react to SMBus commands to this address.
+You need to provide chip addresses as a module parameter when loading this
+driver, which will then only react to SMBus commands to these addresses.
 
 No hardware is needed nor associated with this module.  It will accept write
-quick commands to one address; it will respond to the other commands (also
-to one address) by reading from or writing to an array in memory.  It will
-also spam the kernel logs for every command it handles.
+quick commands to the specified addresses; it will respond to the other
+commands (also to the specified addresses) by reading from or writing to
+arrays in memory.  It will also spam the kernel logs for every command it
+handles.
 
 A pointer register with auto-increment is implemented for all byte
 operations.  This allows for continuous byte reads like those supported by
@@ -26,8 +27,8 @@ The typical use-case is like this:
 
 PARAMETERS:
 
-int chip_addr:
-        The SMBus address to emulate a chip at.
+int chip_addr[10]:
+        The SMBus addresses to emulate chips at.
 
 CAVEATS:
 
@@ -41,9 +42,6 @@ If the hardware for your driver has banked registers (e.g. Winbond sensors
 chips) this module will not work well - although it could be extended to
 support that pretty easily.
 
-Only one chip address is supported - although this module could be
-extended to support more.
-
 If you spam it hard enough, printk can be lossy.  This module really wants
 something like relayfs.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
index 8ec54b974b67..744687dd195b 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
@@ -99,6 +99,20 @@ Transaction IDs
   request/response pairs.  The upper 32 bits are reserved for use by
   the kernel and will be overwritten before a MAD is sent.
 
+P_Key Index Handling
+
+  The old ib_umad interface did not allow setting the P_Key index for
+  MADs that are sent and did not provide a way for obtaining the P_Key
+  index of received MADs.  A new layout for struct ib_user_mad_hdr
+  with a pkey_index member has been defined; however, to preserve
+  binary compatibility with older applications, this new layout will
+  not be used unless the IB_USER_MAD_ENABLE_PKEY ioctl is called
+  before a file descriptor is used for anything else.
+
+  In September 2008, the IB_USER_MAD_ABI_VERSION will be incremented
+  to 6, the new layout of struct ib_user_mad_hdr will be used by
+  default, and the IB_USER_MAD_ENABLE_PKEY ioctl will be removed.
+
 Setting IsSM Capability Bit
 
   To set the IsSM capability bit for a port, simply open the
diff --git a/Documentation/input/iforce-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/iforce-protocol.txt
index 95df4ca70e71..8777d2d321e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/iforce-protocol.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/iforce-protocol.txt
@@ -1,254 +1,254 @@
-** Introduction

-This document describes what I managed to discover about the protocol used to

-specify force effects to I-Force 2.0 devices.  None of this information comes

-from Immerse. That's why you should not trust what is written in this

-document. This document is intended to help understanding the protocol.

-This is not a reference. Comments and corrections are welcome.  To contact me,

-send an email to: deneux@ifrance.com

-

-** WARNING **

-I may not be held responsible for any dammage or harm caused if you try to

-send data to your I-Force device based on what you read in this document.

-

-** Preliminary Notes:

-All values are hexadecimal with big-endian encoding (msb on the left). Beware,

-values inside packets are encoded using little-endian.  Bytes whose roles are

-unknown are marked ???  Information that needs deeper inspection is marked (?)

-

-** General form of a packet **

-This is how packets look when the device uses the rs232 to communicate.

-2B OP LEN DATA CS

-CS is the checksum. It is equal to the exclusive or of all bytes.

-

-When using USB:

-OP DATA

-The 2B, LEN and CS fields have disappeared, probably because USB handles frames and

-data corruption is handled or unsignificant.

-

-First, I describe effects that are sent by the device to the computer

-

-** Device input state

-This packet is used to indicate the state of each button and the value of each

-axis

-OP= 01 for a joystick, 03 for a wheel

-LEN= Varies from device to device

-00 X-Axis lsb

-01 X-Axis msb

-02 Y-Axis lsb, or gas pedal for a wheel

-03 Y-Axis msb, or brake pedal for a wheel

-04 Throttle

-05 Buttons

-06 Lower 4 bits: Buttons

-   Upper 4 bits: Hat

-07 Rudder

-

-** Device effects states

-OP= 02

-LEN= Varies

-00 ? Bit 1 (Value 2) is the value of the deadman switch

-01 Bit 8 is set if the effect is playing. Bits 0 to 7 are the effect id.

-02 ??

-03 Address of parameter block changed (lsb)

-04 Address of parameter block changed (msb)

-05 Address of second parameter block changed (lsb)

-... depending on the number of parameter blocks updated

-

-** Force effect **

-OP=  01

-LEN= 0e

-00 Channel (when playing several effects at the same time, each must be assigned a channel)

-01 Wave form

-        Val 00 Constant

-        Val 20 Square

-        Val 21 Triangle

-        Val 22 Sine

-        Val 23 Sawtooth up

-        Val 24 Sawtooth down

-        Val 40 Spring (Force = f(pos))

-        Val 41 Friction (Force = f(velocity)) and Inertia (Force = f(acceleration))

-

-        

-02 Axes affected and trigger

-        Bits 4-7: Val 2 = effect along one axis. Byte 05 indicates direction

-                  Val 4 = X axis only. Byte 05 must contain 5a

-                  Val 8 = Y axis only. Byte 05 must contain b4

-                  Val c = X and Y axes. Bytes 05 must contain 60

-        Bits 0-3: Val 0 = No trigger

-                  Val x+1 = Button x triggers the effect

-        When the whole byte is 0, cancel the previously set trigger

-

-03-04 Duration of effect (little endian encoding, in ms)

-

-05 Direction of effect, if applicable. Else, see 02 for value to assign.

-

-06-07 Minimum time between triggering.

-

-08-09 Address of periodicity or magnitude parameters

-0a-0b Address of attack and fade parameters, or ffff if none.

-*or*

-08-09 Address of interactive parameters for X-axis, or ffff if not applicable

-0a-0b Address of interactive parameters for Y-axis, or ffff if not applicable

-

-0c-0d Delay before execution of effect (little endian encoding, in ms)

-

-

-** Time based parameters **

-

-*** Attack and fade ***

-OP=  02

-LEN= 08

-00-01 Address where to store the parameteres

-02-03 Duration of attack (little endian encoding, in ms)

-04 Level at end of attack. Signed byte.

-05-06 Duration of fade.

-07 Level at end of fade.

-

-*** Magnitude ***

-OP=  03

-LEN= 03

-00-01 Address

-02 Level. Signed byte.

-

-*** Periodicity ***

-OP=  04

-LEN= 07

-00-01 Address

-02 Magnitude. Signed byte.

-03 Offset. Signed byte.

-04 Phase. Val 00 = 0 deg, Val 40 = 90 degs.

-05-06 Period (little endian encoding, in ms)

-

-** Interactive parameters **

-OP=  05

-LEN= 0a

-00-01 Address

-02 Positive Coeff

-03 Negative Coeff

-04+05 Offset (center)

-06+07 Dead band (Val 01F4 = 5000 (decimal))

-08 Positive saturation (Val 0a = 1000 (decimal) Val 64 = 10000 (decimal))

-09 Negative saturation

-

-The encoding is a bit funny here: For coeffs, these are signed values. The

-maximum value is 64 (100 decimal), the min is 9c.

-For the offset, the minimum value is FE0C, the maximum value is 01F4.

-For the deadband, the minimum value is 0, the max is 03E8.

-

-** Controls **

-OP=  41

-LEN= 03

-00 Channel

-01 Start/Stop

-        Val 00: Stop

-        Val 01: Start and play once.

-        Val 41: Start and play n times (See byte 02 below)

-02 Number of iterations n.

-

-** Init **

-

-*** Querying features ***

-OP=  ff

-Query command. Length varies according to the query type.

-The general format of this packet is:

-ff 01 QUERY [INDEX] CHECKSUM

-reponses are of the same form:

-FF LEN QUERY VALUE_QUERIED CHECKSUM2

-where LEN = 1 + length(VALUE_QUERIED)

-

-**** Query ram size ****

-QUERY = 42 ('B'uffer size)

-The device should reply with the same packet plus two additionnal bytes

-containing the size of the memory:

-ff 03 42 03 e8 CS would mean that the device has 1000 bytes of ram available.

-

-**** Query number of effects ****

-QUERY = 4e ('N'umber of effects)

-The device should respond by sending the number of effects that can be played

-at the same time (one byte)

-ff 02 4e 14 CS would stand for 20 effects.

-

-**** Vendor's id ****

-QUERY = 4d ('M'anufacturer)

-Query the vendors'id (2 bytes)

-

-**** Product id *****

-QUERY = 50 ('P'roduct)

-Query the product id (2 bytes)

-

-**** Open device ****

-QUERY = 4f ('O'pen) 

-No data returned.

-

-**** Close device *****

-QUERY = 43 ('C')lose

-No data returned.

-

-**** Query effect ****

-QUERY = 45 ('E') 

-Send effect type.

-Returns nonzero if supported (2 bytes)

-

-**** Firmware Version ****

-QUERY = 56 ('V'ersion)

-Sends back 3 bytes - major, minor, subminor

-

-*** Initialisation of the device ***

-

-**** Set Control ****

-!!! Device dependent, can be different on different models !!!

-OP=  40 <idx> <val> [<val>]

-LEN= 2 or 3

-00 Idx

-   Idx 00 Set dead zone (0..2048) 

-   Idx 01 Ignore Deadman sensor (0..1)     

-   Idx 02 Enable comm watchdog (0..1)     

-   Idx 03 Set the strength of the spring (0..100)   

-   Idx 04 Enable or disable the spring (0/1)

-   Idx 05 Set axis saturation threshold (0..2048) 

-

-**** Set Effect State ****

-OP=  42 <val>

-LEN= 1

-00 State

-   Bit 3 Pause force feedback

-   Bit 2 Enable force feedback

-   Bit 0 Stop all effects

-

-**** Set overall gain ****

-OP=  43 <val>

-LEN= 1

-00 Gain

-   Val 00 = 0%

-   Val 40 = 50%

-   Val 80 = 100%

-

-** Parameter memory **

-

-Each device has a certain amount of memory to store parameters of effects.

-The amount of RAM may vary, I encountered values from 200 to 1000 bytes. Below

-is the amount of memory apparently needed for every set of parameters:

- - period : 0c

- - magnitude : 02

- - attack and fade : 0e

- - interactive : 08

-

-** Appendix: How to study the protocol ? **

-

-1. Generate effects using the force editor provided with the DirectX SDK, or use Immersion Studio (freely available at their web site in the developer section: www.immersion.com)

-2. Start a soft spying RS232 or USB (depending on where you connected your joystick/wheel). I used ComPortSpy from fCoder (alpha version!)

-3. Play the effect, and watch what happens on the spy screen.

-

-A few words about ComPortSpy:

-At first glance, this soft seems, hum, well... buggy. In fact, data appear with a few seconds latency. Personnaly, I restart it every time I play an effect.

-Remember it's free (as in free beer) and alpha!

-

-** URLS **

-Check www.immerse.com for Immersion Studio, and www.fcoder.com for ComPortSpy.

-

-** Author of this document **

-Johann Deneux <deneux@ifrance.com>

-Home page at http://www.esil.univ-mrs.fr/~jdeneux/projects/ff/

-

-Additions by Vojtech Pavlik.

-

-I-Force is trademark of Immersion Corp.

+** Introduction
+This document describes what I managed to discover about the protocol used to
+specify force effects to I-Force 2.0 devices.  None of this information comes
+from Immerse. That's why you should not trust what is written in this
+document. This document is intended to help understanding the protocol.
+This is not a reference. Comments and corrections are welcome.  To contact me,
+send an email to: deneux@ifrance.com
+
+** WARNING **
+I may not be held responsible for any dammage or harm caused if you try to
+send data to your I-Force device based on what you read in this document.
+
+** Preliminary Notes:
+All values are hexadecimal with big-endian encoding (msb on the left). Beware,
+values inside packets are encoded using little-endian.  Bytes whose roles are
+unknown are marked ???  Information that needs deeper inspection is marked (?)
+
+** General form of a packet **
+This is how packets look when the device uses the rs232 to communicate.
+2B OP LEN DATA CS
+CS is the checksum. It is equal to the exclusive or of all bytes.
+
+When using USB:
+OP DATA
+The 2B, LEN and CS fields have disappeared, probably because USB handles frames and
+data corruption is handled or unsignificant.
+
+First, I describe effects that are sent by the device to the computer
+
+** Device input state
+This packet is used to indicate the state of each button and the value of each
+axis
+OP= 01 for a joystick, 03 for a wheel
+LEN= Varies from device to device
+00 X-Axis lsb
+01 X-Axis msb
+02 Y-Axis lsb, or gas pedal for a wheel
+03 Y-Axis msb, or brake pedal for a wheel
+04 Throttle
+05 Buttons
+06 Lower 4 bits: Buttons
+   Upper 4 bits: Hat
+07 Rudder
+
+** Device effects states
+OP= 02
+LEN= Varies
+00 ? Bit 1 (Value 2) is the value of the deadman switch
+01 Bit 8 is set if the effect is playing. Bits 0 to 7 are the effect id.
+02 ??
+03 Address of parameter block changed (lsb)
+04 Address of parameter block changed (msb)
+05 Address of second parameter block changed (lsb)
+... depending on the number of parameter blocks updated
+
+** Force effect **
+OP=  01
+LEN= 0e
+00 Channel (when playing several effects at the same time, each must be assigned a channel)
+01 Wave form
+        Val 00 Constant
+        Val 20 Square
+        Val 21 Triangle
+        Val 22 Sine
+        Val 23 Sawtooth up
+        Val 24 Sawtooth down
+        Val 40 Spring (Force = f(pos))
+        Val 41 Friction (Force = f(velocity)) and Inertia (Force = f(acceleration))
+
+
+02 Axes affected and trigger
+        Bits 4-7: Val 2 = effect along one axis. Byte 05 indicates direction
+                  Val 4 = X axis only. Byte 05 must contain 5a
+                  Val 8 = Y axis only. Byte 05 must contain b4
+                  Val c = X and Y axes. Bytes 05 must contain 60
+        Bits 0-3: Val 0 = No trigger
+                  Val x+1 = Button x triggers the effect
+        When the whole byte is 0, cancel the previously set trigger
+
+03-04 Duration of effect (little endian encoding, in ms)
+
+05 Direction of effect, if applicable. Else, see 02 for value to assign.
+
+06-07 Minimum time between triggering.
+
+08-09 Address of periodicity or magnitude parameters
+0a-0b Address of attack and fade parameters, or ffff if none.
+*or*
+08-09 Address of interactive parameters for X-axis, or ffff if not applicable
+0a-0b Address of interactive parameters for Y-axis, or ffff if not applicable
+
+0c-0d Delay before execution of effect (little endian encoding, in ms)
+
+
+** Time based parameters **
+
+*** Attack and fade ***
+OP=  02
+LEN= 08
+00-01 Address where to store the parameteres
+02-03 Duration of attack (little endian encoding, in ms)
+04 Level at end of attack. Signed byte.
+05-06 Duration of fade.
+07 Level at end of fade.
+
+*** Magnitude ***
+OP=  03
+LEN= 03
+00-01 Address
+02 Level. Signed byte.
+
+*** Periodicity ***
+OP=  04
+LEN= 07
+00-01 Address
+02 Magnitude. Signed byte.
+03 Offset. Signed byte.
+04 Phase. Val 00 = 0 deg, Val 40 = 90 degs.
+05-06 Period (little endian encoding, in ms)
+
+** Interactive parameters **
+OP=  05
+LEN= 0a
+00-01 Address
+02 Positive Coeff
+03 Negative Coeff
+04+05 Offset (center)
+06+07 Dead band (Val 01F4 = 5000 (decimal))
+08 Positive saturation (Val 0a = 1000 (decimal) Val 64 = 10000 (decimal))
+09 Negative saturation
+
+The encoding is a bit funny here: For coeffs, these are signed values. The
+maximum value is 64 (100 decimal), the min is 9c.
+For the offset, the minimum value is FE0C, the maximum value is 01F4.
+For the deadband, the minimum value is 0, the max is 03E8.
+
+** Controls **
+OP=  41
+LEN= 03
+00 Channel
+01 Start/Stop
+        Val 00: Stop
+        Val 01: Start and play once.
+        Val 41: Start and play n times (See byte 02 below)
+02 Number of iterations n.
+
+** Init **
+
+*** Querying features ***
+OP=  ff
+Query command. Length varies according to the query type.
+The general format of this packet is:
+ff 01 QUERY [INDEX] CHECKSUM
+reponses are of the same form:
+FF LEN QUERY VALUE_QUERIED CHECKSUM2
+where LEN = 1 + length(VALUE_QUERIED)
+
+**** Query ram size ****
+QUERY = 42 ('B'uffer size)
+The device should reply with the same packet plus two additionnal bytes
+containing the size of the memory:
+ff 03 42 03 e8 CS would mean that the device has 1000 bytes of ram available.
+
+**** Query number of effects ****
+QUERY = 4e ('N'umber of effects)
+The device should respond by sending the number of effects that can be played
+at the same time (one byte)
+ff 02 4e 14 CS would stand for 20 effects.
+
+**** Vendor's id ****
+QUERY = 4d ('M'anufacturer)
+Query the vendors'id (2 bytes)
+
+**** Product id *****
+QUERY = 50 ('P'roduct)
+Query the product id (2 bytes)
+
+**** Open device ****
+QUERY = 4f ('O'pen)
+No data returned.
+
+**** Close device *****
+QUERY = 43 ('C')lose
+No data returned.
+
+**** Query effect ****
+QUERY = 45 ('E')
+Send effect type.
+Returns nonzero if supported (2 bytes)
+
+**** Firmware Version ****
+QUERY = 56 ('V'ersion)
+Sends back 3 bytes - major, minor, subminor
+
+*** Initialisation of the device ***
+
+**** Set Control ****
+!!! Device dependent, can be different on different models !!!
+OP=  40 <idx> <val> [<val>]
+LEN= 2 or 3
+00 Idx
+   Idx 00 Set dead zone (0..2048)
+   Idx 01 Ignore Deadman sensor (0..1)
+   Idx 02 Enable comm watchdog (0..1)
+   Idx 03 Set the strength of the spring (0..100)
+   Idx 04 Enable or disable the spring (0/1)
+   Idx 05 Set axis saturation threshold (0..2048)
+
+**** Set Effect State ****
+OP=  42 <val>
+LEN= 1
+00 State
+   Bit 3 Pause force feedback
+   Bit 2 Enable force feedback
+   Bit 0 Stop all effects
+
+**** Set overall gain ****
+OP=  43 <val>
+LEN= 1
+00 Gain
+   Val 00 = 0%
+   Val 40 = 50%
+   Val 80 = 100%
+
+** Parameter memory **
+
+Each device has a certain amount of memory to store parameters of effects.
+The amount of RAM may vary, I encountered values from 200 to 1000 bytes. Below
+is the amount of memory apparently needed for every set of parameters:
+ - period : 0c
+ - magnitude : 02
+ - attack and fade : 0e
+ - interactive : 08
+
+** Appendix: How to study the protocol ? **
+
+1. Generate effects using the force editor provided with the DirectX SDK, or use Immersion Studio (freely available at their web site in the developer section: www.immersion.com)
+2. Start a soft spying RS232 or USB (depending on where you connected your joystick/wheel). I used ComPortSpy from fCoder (alpha version!)
+3. Play the effect, and watch what happens on the spy screen.
+
+A few words about ComPortSpy:
+At first glance, this soft seems, hum, well... buggy. In fact, data appear with a few seconds latency. Personnaly, I restart it every time I play an effect.
+Remember it's free (as in free beer) and alpha!
+
+** URLS **
+Check www.immerse.com for Immersion Studio, and www.fcoder.com for ComPortSpy.
+
+** Author of this document **
+Johann Deneux <deneux@ifrance.com>
+Home page at http://www.esil.univ-mrs.fr/~jdeneux/projects/ff/
+
+Additions by Vojtech Pavlik.
+
+I-Force is trademark of Immersion Corp.
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
index 9f08dab1e75b..d9d832c010ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-NOTE:
+NOTE:
 This is a version of Documentation/HOWTO translated into Japanese.
 This document is maintained by Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata@ab.jp.nec.com>
 and the JF Project team <www.linux.or.jp/JF>.
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a
 fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try
 to update the original English file first.
 
-Last Updated: 2007/07/18
+Last Updated: 2007/09/23
 ==================================
 �れ��
-linux-2.6.22/Documentation/HOWTO
+linux-2.6.23/Documentation/HOWTO
 �和訳��。
 
 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ >
-翻訳日： 2007/07/16
+翻訳日： 2007/09/19
 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com>
 校正者： �倉�ん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com>
          �林 雅典�ん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp>
@@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ linux-2.6.22/Documentation/HOWTO
          野��ん (Kenji Noguchi) <tokyo246 at gmail dot com>
          河内�ん (Takayoshi Kochi) <t-kochi at bq dot jp dot nec dot com>
          岩本�ん (iwamoto) <iwamoto.kn at ncos dot nec dot co dot jp>
+         内田�ん (Satoshi Uchida) <s-uchida at ap dot jp dot nec dot com>
 ==================================
 
 Linux カー�ル開発�やり方
@@ -40,7 +41,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ル開発コミュニティã�¨å…±ã�«æ´»å‹•ã�™ã‚‹ã‚„り方を学ã�
 手助���り��。
 
 も����ドキュメント������������場������ドキュメン
-ト�最後�リスト��メンテナー�パッ�を�������。
+ト�最後�リスト��メンテナ�パッ�を�������。
 
 ����
 ---------
@@ -59,7 +60,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ル開発コミュニティã�¨å…±ã�«æ´»å‹•ã�™ã‚‹ã‚„り方を学ã�
 �ル開発者��必���。アーキテク�ャ���低レベル部分�開発を�る�
 ���れ��(�ん�アーキテク�ャ�も)アセンブリ(訳注: 言語)�必��り
 ��ん。以下�本��C 言語��分�知識や何年も�経験����代�るも�
-���り��ん��少���もリファレンス������本��。
+���り��ん��少���もリファレンス����良�本��。
  - "The C Programming Language" by Kernighan and Ritchie [Prentice Hall]
  -『プログラミング言語Ｃ第2版�(B.W. カーニ�ン/D.M. リッ�ー著 石田晴久訳) [共立出版]
  - "Practical C Programming" by Steve Oualline [O'Reilly]
@@ -76,7 +77,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ル開発コミュニティã�¨å…±ã�«æ´»å‹•ã�™ã‚‹ã‚„り方を学ã�
 �����カー�ル�ツール�ェインや C 言語拡張�置���る�����
 ����る����り�������り����残念����決定的�リファ
 レンス�存在���ん。情報を得る���gcc � info ページ( info gcc )を
-������。
+見�����。
 
 ����既存�開発コミュニティ�一緒�作業�る方法を学������る�
 ��留�������。��コミュニティ��コーディング�スタイル�
@@ -92,7 +93,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ル開発コミュニティã�¨å…±ã�«æ´»å‹•ã�™ã‚‹ã‚„り方を学ã�
 
 Linux カー�ル�ソースコード� GPL ライセンス�下�リリース�れ���
 �。ライセンス�詳細������ソースツリー�メインディレクトリ�存在
-�る�COPYING �ファイルを������。も�ライセンス�����ら�質
+�る�COPYING �ファイルを見�����。も�ライセンス�����ら�質
 ���れ��Linux Kernel メーリングリスト�質��る���������
 法律家�相談������。メーリングリスト�人��法律家�����法的
 �題�����彼ら�声明�����る�����り��ん。
@@ -109,7 +110,8 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�¯å¹…広ã�„範囲ã�®ãƒ‰ã‚­ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’å�
 新��ドキュメントファイルも追加�る��を勧���。
 カー�ル�変更��カー�ル�ユーザ空間�公開���るインターフェイス�
 変更を引�起��場����変更を説明�るマニュアルページ�パッ�や情報
-をマニュアルページ�メンテナ mtk-manpages@gmx.net ��る��を勧���。
+をマニュアルページ�メンテナ mtk-manpages@gmx.net ��る��を勧��
+�。
 
 以下�カー�ルソースツリー���れ��る読ん�����ファイル�一覧�
 �-
@@ -117,7 +119,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�¯å¹…広ã�„範囲ã�®ãƒ‰ã‚­ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’å�
   README
     ��ファイル� Linuxカー�ル�簡��背景�カー�ルを設定(訳注
     configure )��生�(訳注 build )�る���必�����何��書�れ
-    ����。カー�ル�関������人����らスタート�る�よ��
+    ����。カー�ル�関������人����らスタート�る�良��
     �ょ�。
 
   Documentation/Changes
@@ -128,7 +130,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�¯å¹…広ã�„範囲ã�®ãƒ‰ã‚­ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’å�
   Documentation/CodingStyle
     �れ� Linux カー�ル�コーディングスタイル�背景��る�由を記述
     �����。全��新��コード���ドキュメント��るガイドライン
-    �従���る��を期待�れ����。大部分�メンテナー��れら�ルー
+    �従���る��を期待�れ����。大部分�メンテナ��れら�ルー
     ル�従���るも���を��付��多��人�正��スタイル�コード
     ��をレビュー���。
 
@@ -168,16 +170,16 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�¯å¹…広ã�„範囲ã�®ãƒ‰ã‚­ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’å�
     支�������。
 
   Documentation/ManagementStyle
-    ��ドキュメント� Linux カー�ル�メンテナー����行動�る��
+    ��ドキュメント� Linux カー�ル�メンテナ����行動�る��
     彼ら�手法�背景��る共有�れ��る精神����記述�����。�
     れ�カー�ル開発��心者�ら（も������興味��る���人�も）
-    ����。���ら��ドキュメント��カー�ルメンテナー��独特�
+    ����。���ら��ドキュメント��カー�ルメンテナ��独特�
     行動�����多��誤解や混乱を解消�る�ら��。
 
   Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
     ��ファイル���よ�� stable カー�ル�リリース�行�れる��ルー
     ル�記述�れ����。����れら�リリース�中�����変更を�
-    り入れ�もら���場��何を�れ�����示�れ����。
+    り入れ�もら���場��何を�れ�良���示�れ����。
 
   Documentation/kernel-docs.txt
 　　カー�ル開発�付��る外部ドキュメント�リスト��。も�����
@@ -218,9 +220,9 @@ web サイトã�«ã�¯ã€�コードã�®æ§‹æˆ�ã€�サブシステムã€�ç�¾åœ¨å­˜åœ¨ã�™ã
 ��������カー�ル�コンパイル�やり方やパッ��当�方���間接
 的�基本情報も記述�れ����。
 
-�������らスタート��よ����ら����Linux カー�ル開発コミュ
+�������らスタート��良����ら����Linux カー�ル開発コミュ
 ニティ��加��何��る��を�����る場����Linux kernel
-Janitor's プロジェクト����よ���ょ� -
+Janitor's プロジェクト����良���ょ� -
         http://janitor.kernelnewbies.org/
 �����よ��スタートを�る��������場所��。�����
 Linux カー�ルソースツリー�中���れる��れ����修正���れ��
@@ -243,7 +245,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルソースツリーã�®ä¸­ã�«å�«ã�¾ã‚Œã‚‹ã€�ã��ã‚Œã�„ã�«ã�—ã€�ä¿
 自己�照方���索引���� web 形���ソースコードを�照�る���
 ����。��最新�素晴��カー�ルコード�リ�ジトリ�以下�見��り
 ��-
-        http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/
+        http://sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/
 
 開発プロセス
 -----------------------
@@ -265,9 +267,9 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�®é–‹ç™ºãƒ—ロセスã�¯ç�¾åœ¨å¹¾ã�¤ã�‹ã�®ç•°ã�ªã‚‹ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ã‚
 以下���り-
 
   - 新��カー�ル�リリース�れ�直後��2週間�特別期間�設�られ�
-    ��期間中��メンテナー�� Linus �大��差分を�る������
-    �。��よ��差分�通常 -mm カー�ル�数週間��れ���パッ��
-    �。 大��変更� git(カー�ル�ソース管�ツール�詳細�
+    ��期間中��メンテナ�� Linus �大��差分を�る�������。
+    ��よ��差分�通常 -mm カー�ル�数週間��れ���パッ���。
+    大��変更� git(カー�ル�ソース管�ツール�詳細�
     http://git.or.cz/  �照) を使���る��好���やり方����パッ
     �ファイル�形�����る��も�分��。
 
@@ -285,6 +287,10 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルã�®é–‹ç™ºãƒ—ロセスã�¯ç�¾åœ¨å¹¾ã�¤ã�‹ã�®ç•°ã�ªã‚‹ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ã‚
     �安定��状態��る�判断�����リリース�れ��。目標�毎週新
     �� -rc カー�ルをリリース�る����。
 
+   - 以下� URL �� -rc リリース�存在�る既知�後戻り�題�リスト
+     �追跡�れ��-
+     http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions
+
   - ��プロセス�カー�ル� 「準備������考�られる��継続��
     �。��プロセス����� 6週間継続���。
 
@@ -331,8 +337,8 @@ Andrew ã�¯å€‹åˆ¥ã�®ã‚µãƒ–システムカーãƒ�ルツリーã�¨ãƒ‘ッãƒ�ã‚’å…¨ã�¦é
 linux-kernel メーリングリスト��集�れ�多数�パッ���時�一���
 ����。
 ��ツリー�新機能�パッ��検証�れる場��り��。�る期間�間パッ�
-� -mm �入��価値を証明�れ�ら�Andrew やサブシステムメンテナ��メ
-インライン�入れるよ�� Linus �プッシュ���。
+� -mm �入��価値を証明�れ�ら�Andrew やサブシステムメンテナ��
+メインライン�入れるよ�� Linus �プッシュ���。
 
 メインカー�ルツリー���る��� Linus ��る�������新��パッ
 �� -mm ツリー�テスト�れる���強�推奨�れ��。
@@ -460,7 +466,7 @@ MAINTAINERS ファイルã�«ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆã�Œã�‚ã‚Šã�¾ã�™ã�®ã�§å�‚ç…§ã�—ã�¦ã��ã� ã�•ã�
 �ん-
 彼ら�����パッ��行毎�コメントを入れ��������������
 る���り��ん。����メールプログラム�空白やタブを圧縮���よ�
-�確���方�����。最��良�テスト�����自分�メールを���
+�確���方�良���。最��良�テスト�����自分�メールを���
 �����パッ�を自分�当���る����。も��れ����行����
 ら�����メールプログラムを直��もら���正��動�よ��変�る�
 ���。
@@ -507,14 +513,14 @@ MAINTAINERS ファイルã�«ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆã�Œã�‚ã‚Šã�¾ã�™ã�®ã�§å�‚ç…§ã�—ã�¦ã��ã� ã�•ã�
 �も普通�����。�れ�����パッ����入れられ��������
 � *�り��ん*�������自身��対�る��を�味�る��も *�り�
 �ん*。��自分�パッ��対��指摘�れ��題を全�修正�����れ�
-�����。
+良����。
 
 
 カー�ルコミュニティ��業組織����
 -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
 カー�ルコミュニティ�大部分��統的�会社�開発環境��異��やり方�
-動�����。以下��題を��る�����る�よ�����リスト��-
+動�����。以下��題を��る�����る�良����リスト��-
 
   �����案�る変更����言�������言�方：
 
@@ -525,7 +531,7 @@ MAINTAINERS ファイルã�«ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆã�Œã�‚ã‚Šã�¾ã�™ã�®ã�§å�‚ç…§ã�—ã�¦ã��ã� ã�•ã�
     - "以下�一連����パッ�群���..."
     - "�れ�典型的�マシン��性能を�上����.."
 
-  や��方���悪�言�方：
+  や��方�良�悪�言�方：
 
     - ��やり方� AIX/ptx/Solaris ����������る���
     - ���れを20年も�間や�������ら
@@ -575,10 +581,10 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルコミュニティã�¯ã€�一度ã�«å¤§é‡�ã�®ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ã�®å¡Šã‚’å–
 
 1) ���パッ������パッ���用�れる見込�を大������カー
    �ル�人��パッ��正������を確��る時間や労力を�����
-   ら��。5行�パッ��メンテナ����1秒見る����用����。�
-   ���500行�パッ���正����をレビュー�る��数時間��る�も
-   �れ��ん(時間�パッ��サイズ���より指数関数�比例����り�
-   �)
+   ら��。5行�パッ��メンテナ����1秒見る����用����。
+   ����500行�パッ���正����をレビュー�る��数時間��る�
+   も�れ��ん(時間�パッ��サイズ���より指数関数�比例����り
+   ��)
 
    ���パッ��何�������デ�ッグも��も簡���り��。パッ
    �を1個1個�り除������も大��パッ�を当��後�(���何��
@@ -587,23 +593,23 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルコミュニティã�¯ã€�一度ã�«å¤§é‡�ã�®ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ã�®å¡Šã‚’å–
 2) ���パッ�を�る�������る����書�直���シンプル��
    る(も������順番を変�る���も)��も���も����。
 
-以下�カー�ル開発者� Al Viro ����話���：
+以下�カー�ル開発者� Al Viro ����話��：
 
         "生徒�数学�宿題を採点�る先生���を考���������先
-        生�生徒�解�到��る���試行錯誤を�����������ょ
-        �。先生�簡潔�最高�解を������。良�生徒��れを知��
+        生�生徒�解�到��る���試行錯誤を見����������ょ
+        �。先生�簡潔�最高�解を見�����。良�生徒��れを知��
         �り����最終解���中間作業を�出�る���決������
         �"
 
-        カー�ル開発�も�れ�����。メンテナー��レビューア���
-        �題を解決�る解�背後��る�考プロセスを���������ん。
-        彼ら��純���や��解決方法を������。
+        カー�ル開発�も�れ�����。メンテナ��レビューア���
+        �題を解決�る解�背後��る�考プロセスを見��������ん。
+        彼ら��純���や��解決方法を見�����。
 
 ��や��解を説明�る���コミュニティ�共�仕事を��未解決�仕事を
 議論�る����ランスをキープ�る��難���も�れ��ん。
 ���ら�開発プロセス�早期段階�改善����フィード�ックをもら�よ
-���る�も������変更点を���部分�分割��全体����完��
-����仕事を(部分的�)�り込ん�もら�るよ���る��も������。
+���る�も良�����変更点を���部分�分割��全体����完��
+����仕事を(部分的�)�り込ん�もら�るよ���る��も良�����。
 
 �����上������も�や�"将�直�" よ��パッ�を�本����
 �もら�よ�����も��れ���付�られ����を�解������。
@@ -629,7 +635,7 @@ Linux カーãƒ�ルコミュニティã�¯ã€�一度ã�«å¤§é‡�ã�®ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ã�®å¡Šã‚’å–
   - テスト�果
 
 �れ����全����よ���る��������詳細��以下�ドキュメ
-ント� ChangeLog セクションを������-
+ント� ChangeLog セクションを見�����-
   "The Perfect Patch"
       http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
 
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 975f029be25c..c323778270ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
         APIC    APIC support is enabled.
         APM     Advanced Power Management support is enabled.
         AX25    Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
+        BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled.
         DRM     Direct Rendering Management support is enabled.
         EDD     BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled
         EFI     EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled
@@ -67,6 +68,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
         PARIDE  The ParIDE (parallel port IDE) subsystem is enabled.
         PARISC  The PA-RISC architecture is enabled.
         PCI     PCI bus support is enabled.
+        PCIE    PCI Express support is enabled.
         PCMCIA  The PCMCIA subsystem is enabled.
         PNP     Plug & Play support is enabled.
         PPC     PowerPC architecture is enabled.
@@ -468,9 +470,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         Format:
                         <first_slot>,<last_slot>,<port>,<enum_bit>[,<debug>]
 
-        cpia_pp=        [HW,PPT]
-                        Format: { parport<nr> | auto | none }
-
         crashkernel=nn[KMG]@ss[KMG]
                         [KNL] Reserve a chunk of physical memory to
                         hold a kernel to switch to with kexec on panic.
@@ -553,7 +552,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         dtc3181e=       [HW,SCSI]
 
-        earlyprintk=    [X86-32,X86-64,SH]
+        earlyprintk=    [X86-32,X86-64,SH,BLACKFIN]
                         earlyprintk=vga
                         earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
 
@@ -866,6 +865,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         lasi=           [HW,SCSI] PARISC LASI driver for the 53c700 chip
                         Format: addr:<io>,irq:<irq>
 
+        libata.noacpi   [LIBATA] Disables use of ACPI in libata suspend/resume
+                        when set.
+                        Format: <int>
+
         load_ramdisk=   [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy
                         See Documentation/ramdisk.txt.
 
@@ -952,14 +955,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         Format: <1-256>
 
         maxcpus=        [SMP] Maximum number of processors that an SMP kernel
-                        should make use of.
-                        Using "nosmp" or "maxcpus=0" will disable SMP
-                        entirely (the MPS table probe still happens, though).
-                        A command-line option of "maxcpus=<NUM>", where <NUM>
-                        is an integer greater than 0, limits the maximum number
-                        of CPUs activated in SMP mode to <NUM>.
-                        Using "maxcpus=1" on an SMP kernel is the trivial
-                        case of an SMP kernel with only one CPU.
+                        should make use of.  maxcpus=n : n >= 0 limits the
+                        kernel to using 'n' processors.  n=0 is a special case,
+                        it is equivalent to "nosmp", which also disables
+                        the IO APIC.
 
         max_addr=[KMG]  [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than or
                         equal to this physical address is ignored.
@@ -1015,6 +1014,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         meye.*=         [HW] Set MotionEye Camera parameters
                         See Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt.
 
+        mfgpt_irq=      [IA-32] Specify the IRQ to use for the
+                        Multi-Function General Purpose Timers on AMD Geode
+                        platforms.
+
         mga=            [HW,DRM]
 
         mousedev.tap_time=
@@ -1086,10 +1089,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor
                         is present.
 
-        noacpi          [LIBATA] Disables use of ACPI in libata suspend/resume
-                        when set.
-                        Format: <int>
-
         noaliencache    [MM, NUMA, SLAB] Disables the allocation of alien
                         caches in the slab allocator.  Saves per-node memory,
                         but will impact performance.
@@ -1166,6 +1165,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         nomce           [X86-32] Machine Check Exception
 
+        nomfgpt         [X86-32] Disable Multi-Function General Purpose
+                        Timer usage (for AMD Geode machines).
+
         noreplace-paravirt      [X86-32,PV_OPS] Don't patch paravirt_ops
 
         noreplace-smp   [X86-32,SMP] Don't replace SMP instructions
@@ -1184,7 +1186,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
         nosep           [BUGS=X86-32] Disables x86 SYSENTER/SYSEXIT support.
 
-        nosmp           [SMP] Tells an SMP kernel to act as a UP kernel.
+        nosmp           [SMP] Tells an SMP kernel to act as a UP kernel,
+                        and disable the IO APIC.  legacy for "maxcpus=0".
 
         nosoftlockup    [KNL] Disable the soft-lockup detector.
 
@@ -1275,6 +1278,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                                 Mechanism 1.
                 conf2           [X86-32] Force use of PCI Configuration
                                 Mechanism 2.
+                noaer           [PCIE] If the PCIEAER kernel config parameter is
+                                enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to
+                                disable the use of PCIE advanced error reporting.
+                nodomains       [PCI] Disable support for multiple PCI
+                                root domains (aka PCI segments, in ACPI-speak).
                 nommconf        [X86-32,X86_64] Disable use of MMCONFIG for PCI
                                 Configuration
                 nomsi           [MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is
@@ -1319,6 +1327,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                                 IRQ routing is enabled.
                 noacpi          [X86-32] Do not use ACPI for IRQ routing
                                 or for PCI scanning.
+                use_crs         [X86-32] Use _CRS for PCI resource
+                                allocation.
                 routeirq        Do IRQ routing for all PCI devices.
                                 This is normally done in pci_enable_device(),
                                 so this option is a temporary workaround
@@ -1435,6 +1445,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
         pt.             [PARIDE]
                         See Documentation/paride.txt.
 
+        pty.legacy_count=
+                        [KNL] Number of legacy pty's. Overwrites compiled-in
+                        default number.
+
         quiet           [KNL] Disable most log messages
 
         r128=           [HW,DRM]
@@ -1826,6 +1840,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                         -1: disable all active trip points in all thermal zones
                         <degrees C>: override all lowest active trip points
 
+        thermal.crt=    [HW,ACPI]
+                        -1: disable all critical trip points in all thermal zones
+                        <degrees C>: lower all critical trip points
+
         thermal.nocrt=  [HW,ACPI]
                         Set to disable actions on ACPI thermal zone
                         critical and hot trip points.
diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b51d7ca842ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO
@@ -0,0 +1,623 @@
+NOTE:
+This is a version of Documentation/HOWTO translated into korean
+This document is maintained by minchan Kim < minchan.kim@gmail.com>
+If you find any difference between this document and the original file or
+a problem with the translation, please contact the maintainer of this file.
+
+Please also note that the purpose of this file is to be easier to
+read for non English (read: korean) speakers and is not intended as
+a fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file please
+try to update the original English file first.
+
+==================================
+� 문서는
+Documentation/HOWTO
+� 한글 번역입니다.
+
+역�： 김민찬 <minchan.kim@gmail.com >
+�수： �제�미 <jamee.lee@samsung.com>
+==================================
+
+어떻게 리눅스 커� 개발� 하는가
+---------------------------------
+
+� 문서는 커� 개발� 있어 가장 중요한 문서�다. � 문서는
+리눅스 커� 개발�가 �는 법과 리눅스 커� 개발 커뮤니티와 �하는
+법� 담고있다. 커� 프로그래��기술�� 측면과 관련� 내용들�
+�함하지 않으려고 하였지만 올바으로 여러분� 안내하는 � �움�
+� 것�다.
+
+� 문서�서 오래� 것� 발견하면 문서� 아래쪽� 나열� 메�트너�게
+패치를 보내달�.
+
+
+소개
+----
+
+�, 여러분� 리눅스 커� 개발�가 �는 법� 배우고 싶�가? 아니면
+�사로부터"� 장치를 위한 리눅스 드��버를 작성하시오"�는 ��
+들었는가? � 문서는 여러분� 겪게 � 과정과 커뮤니티와 �하는 법�
+조언하여 여러분� 목�� 달성하기 위해 필요한 것 모�를 알려주는
+것�다.
+
+커�� 대부분� C로 작성�었어고 몇몇 아키��� �존�� 부분�
+어셈블리로 작성�었다. 커� 개발� 위해 C를 잘 �해하고 있어야 한다.
+여러분� 특정 아키��� low-level 개발� 할 것� 아니�면
+어셈블리(특정 아키��)는 잘 알아야 할 필요는 없다.
+다�� 참고서�들� 기본� 충실한 C �육�나 수년간� 경험� 견주지는
+못하지만 �어� 참고 용�로는 좋� 것�다
+ - "The C Programming Language" by Kernighan and Ritchie [Prentice Hall]
+ - "Practical C Programming" by Steve Oualline [O'Reilly]
+ - "C:  A Reference Manual" by Harbison and Steele [Prentice Hall]
+
+커�� GNU C와 GNU 툴체�� 사용하여 작성�었다. � 툴들� ISO C89 표준�
+따르는 반면 표준� 있지 않� 많� 확장기능� 가지고 있다. 커�� 표준 C
+��브러리와는 관계없� freestanding C 환경�어서 C 표준� �부는
+지��지 않는다. 임�� long long 나누기나 floating point는 지��지 않는다.
+때론 �런 �유로 커�� 그런 확장 기능� 가진 툴체�� 가지고 만들어졌다는
+것� �해하기 어려울 수� 있고 게다가 불행하게� 그런 것� 정확하게 설명하는
+어떤 참고문서� 있지 않다. 정보를 얻기 위해서는 gcc info (`info gcc`)페�지를
+살펴보�.
+
+여러분� 기존� 개발 커뮤니티와 �하는 법� 배우려고 하고 있다는 것�
+기억하�. 코딩, 스타�, 절차� 관한 훌륭한 표준� 가진 사람들� 모�
+다양한 그룹� 있다. � 표준들� 오랜�안 �고 지역�으로 분산� 팀들�
+�해 가장 좋� 방법으로 �하기위하여 찾� 것� 기초로 만들어져왔다.
+그 표준들� 문서화가 잘 �어 있기 때문� 가능한한 미리 많� 표준들�
+관하여 배우려고 시�하�. 다른 사람들� 여러분�나 여러분� 회사가
+�하는 방�� ��하는 것� �하지는 않는다.
+
+
+법� 문제
+---------
+
+리눅스 커� 소스 코드는 GPL로 배�(release)�었다. 소스트리� 메�
+디렉토리� 있는 ��센스� 관하여 �세하게 쓰여 있는 COPYING��는
+파�� ��.여러분� ��센스� 관한 � 깊� 문제를 가지고 있다면
+리눅스 커� 메�� 리스트� 묻지�고 변호사와 연�하�. 메��
+리스트들� 있는 사람들� 변호사가 아니기 때문� 법� 문제� 관하여
+그들� �� �지해서는 안�다.
+
+GPL� 관한 잦� 질문들과 답변들� 다�� 참조하�.
+    http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-faq.html
+
+
+문서
+----
+
+리눅스 커� 소스 트리는 커� 커뮤니티와 �하는 법� 배우기 위한 많�
+귀중한 문서들� 가지고 있다. 새로운 기능들� 커�� 들어가게 � 때,
+그 기능� 어떻게 사용하는지� 관한 설명� 위하여 새로운 문서 파��
+추가하는 것� 권장한다. 커�� 유저스페�스로 노출하는 �터페�스를
+변경하게 �면 변경� 설명하는 메뉴얼 페�지들� 대한 패치나 정보를
+mtk-manpages@gmx.net� 메�트너�게 보낼 것� 권장한다.
+
+다�� 커� 소스 트리� 있는 �어야 할 파�들� 리스트�다.
+  README
+    � 파�� 리눅스 커�� 관하여 간단한 배경 설명과 커�� 설정하고
+    빌드하기 위해 필요한 것� 설명한다. 커�� 입문하는 사람들� 여기서
+    시작해야 한다.
+
+  Documentation/Changes
+    � 파�� 커�� 성공�으로 빌드하고 실행시키기 위해 필요한 다양한
+    소프트웨어 패키지들� 최소 버젼� 나열한다.
+
+  Documentation/CodingStyle
+    � 문서는 리눅스 커� 코딩 스타�과 그렇게 한 몇몇 �유를 설명한다.
+    모든 새로운 코드는 � 문서� 가�드��들� 따�야 한다. 대부분�
+    메�트너들� � 규칙� 따르는 패치들만� 받아들� 것�고 많� 사람들�
+    그 패치가 올바른 스타�� 경우만 코드를 검토할 것�다.
+
+  Documentation/SubmittingPatches
+  Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
+    � 파�들� 성공�으로 패치를 만들고 보내는 법� 다�� 내용들로
+    굉장히 �세히 설명하고 있다(그러나 다�으로 한정�진 않는다).
+       - Email 내용들
+       - Email 양�
+       - 그것� 누구�게 보낼지
+    �러한 규칙들� 따르는 것� 성공� 보장하진 않는다(왜�하면 모든
+    패치들� 내용과 스타�� 관하여 면밀히 검토�기 때문�다).
+    그러나 규칙� 따르지 않는다면 거� 성공하지� 못할 것�다.
+
+    올바른 패치들� 만드는 법� 관한 훌륭한 다른 문서들� 있다.
+    "The Perfect Patch"
+        http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
+    "Linux kernel patch submission format"
+        http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
+
+   Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt
+    � 문서는 ���으로 커�� 변하지 않는 API를 갖지 않�� 결정한
+    �유를 설명하며 다�과 같� 것들� �함한다.
+       - 서브시스템 shim-layer(호환성� 위해?)
+       - 운� 체제들 간� 드��버 ��성
+       - 커� 소스 트리내� 빠른 변화를 늦추는 것(�는 빠른 변화를 막는 것)
+    � 문서는 리눅스 개발 철학� �해하는� 필수��며 다른 운�체제�서
+    리눅스로 옮겨오는 사람들�게는 매우 중요하다.
+
+
+  Documentation/SecurityBugs
+    여러분들� 리눅스 커�� 보안 문제를 발견했다고 ��한다면 � 문서�
+    나온 단계� 따�서 커� 개발�들�게 알리고 그 문제를 해결할 수 있��
+    �와 달�.
+
+  Documentation/ManagementStyle
+    � 문서는 리눅스 커� 메�트너들� 어떻게 그들� 방법론� 정신�
+    어떻게 공유하고 운�하는지를 설명한다. �것� 커� 개발� 입문하는
+    모든 사람들(�는 커� 개발� 작� 호기심��� 있는 사람들)�
+    �어야 할 중요한 문서�다. 왜�하면 � 문서는 커� 메�트너들�
+    �특한 행�� 관하여 �히 있는 오해들과 혼란들� 해소하고 있기
+    때문�다.
+
+  Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
+    � 문서는 안정�� 커� 배�가 �루어지는 규칙� 설명하고 있으며
+    여러분들� �러한 배�들 중 하나� 변경� 하길 �한다면
+    무엇� 해야 하는지를 설명한다.
+
+  Documentation/kernel-docs.txt
+    커� 개발� 관계� 외부 문서� 리스트�다. 커� 내� �함� 문서들
+    중� 여러분� 찾고 싶� 문서를 발견하지 못할 경우 � 리스트를
+    살펴보�.
+
+  Documentation/applying-patches.txt
+    패치가 무엇�며 그것� 커�� 다른 개발 브랜치들� 어떻게
+    �용하는지� 관하여 �세히 설명 하고 있는 좋� 입문서�다.
+
+커�� 소스 코드 그 �체�서 ���으로 만들어질 수 있는 많� 문서들�
+가지고 있다. �것� 커� 내� API� 대한 모든 설명, 그리고 �킹�
+올바르게 처리하는 법� 관한 규칙� �함하고 있다. � 문서는
+Documentation/DocBook/ 디렉토리 내�서 만들어지며 PDF, Postscript, HTML,
+그리고 man 페�지들로 다�과 같� 실행하여 만들어 진다.
+         make pdfdocs
+         make psdocs
+         make htmldocs
+         make mandocs
+��� 명령� 메� 커� 소스 디렉토리로부터 실행한다.
+
+
+커� 개발�가 �는 것
+---------------------
+
+여러분� 리눅스 커� 개발� 관하여 아무것� 모른다면 Linux KernelNewbies
+프로�트를 �야 한다.
+    http://kernelnewbies.org
+그곳� 거� 모든 종류� 기본�� 커� 개발 질문들(질문하기 전� 먼저
+아카�브를 찾아��. 과거� �미 답변�었� 수� 있다)� 할수있는 �움�
+�만한 메�� 리스트가 있다. �한 실시간으로 질문 할수 있는 IRC 채��
+가지고 있으며 리눅스 커� 개발� 배우는 � 유용한 문서들� 보유하고 있다.
+
+웹사�트는 코드구성, 서브시스템들, 그리고 현재 프로�트들
+(트리 내, 외부� 존재하는)� 관한 기본�� 정보들� 가지고 있다. �한
+그곳� 커� 컴파��나 패치를 하는 법과 같� 기본�� 것들�  설명한다.
+
+여러분� 어디서 시작해야 할진 모르지만 커� 개발 커뮤니티� 참여할 수
+있는 �들� 찾길 �한다면 리눅스 커� Janitor 프로�트를 살펴��.
+         http://janitor.kernelnewbies.org/
+그곳� 시작하기� 아주 딱 좋� 곳�다. 그곳� 리눅스 커� 소스 트리내�
+간단히 정리�고 수정� 수 있는 문제들� 관하여 설명한다. 여러분� �
+프로�트를 대표하는 개발�들과 �하면서 �신� 패치를 리눅스 커� 트리�
+반�하기 위한 기본�� 것들� 배우게 �것�며 여러분� 아� 아�디어를
+가지고 있지 않다면 다�� 무엇� 해야할지� 관한 방향� 배울 수 있�
+것�다.
+
+여러분들� �미 커� 트리� 반�하길 �하는 코드 묶�� 가지고 있지만
+올바른 �맷으로 �장하는� �움� 필요하다면 그러한 문제를 �기 위해
+만들어진 kernel-mentors 프로�트가 있다. 그곳� 메�� 리스트�며
+다��서 참조할 수 있다.
+         http://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors
+
+리눅스 커� 코드� 실제 변경� 하기 전� 반드시 그 코드가 어떻게
+�작하는지 �해하고 있어야 한다. 코드를 분�하기 위하여 특정한 툴�
+�움� 빌려서�� 코드를 �접 �는 것보다 좋� 것� 없다(대부분�
+�잘한 부분들� 잘 코멘트�어 있다). 그런 툴들 중� 특히 추천할만한
+것� Linux Cross-Reference project�며 그것� �기 참조 방��며
+소스코드를 ��스� 웹 페�지들� 형태로 보여준다. 최신� 멋진 커�
+코드 저장소는 다�� 통하여 참조할 수 있다.
+      http://sosdg.org/~coywolf/lxr/
+
+
+개발 프로세스
+-------------
+
+리눅스 커� 개발 프로세스는 현재 몇몇 다른 메� 커� "브랜치들"과
+서브시스템� 특화� 커� 브랜치들로 구성�다. 몇몇 다른 메�
+브랜치들� 다�과 같다.
+  - main 2.6.x 커� 트리
+  - 2.6.x.y - 안정� 커� 트리
+  - 2.6.x -git 커� 패치들
+  - 2.6.x -mm 커� 패치들
+  - 서브시스템� 위한 커� 트리들과 패치들
+
+2.6.x 커� 트리
+---------------
+
+2.6.x 커�들� Linux Torvalds가 관리하며 kernel.org� pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/
+디렉토리�서 참조� 수 있다.개발 프로세스는 다�과 같다.
+  - 새로운 커�� 배���마� 2주� 시간� 주어진다. � 기간��
+    메�트너들� � diff들� Linus�게 제출할 수 있다. 대개 � 패치들�
+    몇 주 �안 -mm 커�내� �미 있었� 것들�다. � 변경들� 제출하는 �
+    선호�는 방법�  git(커�� 소스 관리 툴, � 많� 정보들� http://git.or.cz/
+    �서 참조할 수 있다)를 사용하는 것�지만 순수한 패치파�� 형�으로 보내�
+    것� 무관하다.
+  - 2주 후� -rc1 커�� 배��며 지금부터는 전체 커�� 안정성� �향�
+    미칠수 있는 새로운 기능들� �함하지 않는 패치들만� 추가� 수 있다.
+    완전히 새로운 드��버(혹� 파�시스템)는 -rc1 �후�만 받아들여진다는
+    것� 기억해�. 왜�하면 변경� �체내�서만 발�하고 추가� 코드가
+    드��버 외부� 다른 부분�는 �향� 주지 않으므로 그런 변경�
+    퇴보(regression)를 �으킬 만한 위험� 가지고 있지 않기 때문�다. -rc1�
+    배�� �후� git를 사용하여 패치들� Linus�게 보낼수 있지만 패치들�
+    공��� 메�� 리스트로 보내서 검토를 받� 필요가 있다.
+  - 새로운 -rc는 Linus는 현재 git tree가 테스트 하기� 충분히 안정� �태�
+    있다고 �단� 때마다 배��다. 목표는 새로운 -rc 커�� 매주 배�하는
+    것�다.
+  - �러한 프로세스는 커�� "준비"�었다고 여겨질때까지 계��다.
+    프로세스는 대체로 6주간 지��다.
+    - � -rc 배�� 있는 알려진 퇴보� 목�들� 다� URI� 남겨진다.
+    http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions
+
+커� 배�� 있어서 언급할만한 가치가 있는 리눅스 커� 메�� 리스트�
+Andrew Morton� 글� 있다.
+        "커�� 언제 배��지는 아무로 모른다. 왜�하면 배�는 알려진
+         버그� �황� 따� 배��는 것�지 미리정해 놓� 시간� 따�
+          배��는 것� 아니기 때문�다."
+
+2.6.x.y - 안정 커� 트리
+------------------------
+
+4 �리 숫�로 �루어진 버젼� 커�들� -stable 커�들�다. 그것들� 2.6.x
+커��서 발견� � 퇴보들�나 보안 문제들 중 비�� 작고 중요한 수정들�
+�함한다.
+
+�것� 가장 최근� 안정�� 커�� �하는 사용��게 추천�는 브랜치�며,
+개발/실험� 버젼� 테스트하는 것� �는�는 별로 관심� 없다.
+
+어떤 2.6.x.y 커�� 사용가능하지 않다면 그때는 가장 높� 숫�� 2.6.x
+커�� 현재� 안정 커��다.
+
+2.6.x.y는 "stable" 팀<stable@kernel.org>� �해 관리�며 거� 매번 격주로
+배��다.
+
+커� 트리 문서들 내� Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt 파�� 어떤
+종류� 변경들� -stable 트리로 들어왔는지와 배� 프로세스가 어떻게
+진행�는지를 설명한다.
+
+
+2.6.x -git 패치들
+------------------
+git 저장소(그러므로 -git��는 �름� 붙�)�는 날마다 관리�는 Linus�
+커� 트리� snapshot 들� 있다. � 패치들� �반�으로 날마다 배��며
+Linus� 트리� 현재 �태를 나타낸다. � 패치들� 정���지 조금�
+살펴보지 않고 ���으로 �성� 것�므로 -rc 커�들 보다� � 실험��다.
+
+2.6.x -mm 커� 패치들
+---------------------
+Andrew Morton� �해 배�� 실험�� 커� 패치들�다. Andrew는 모든 다른
+서브시스템 커� 트리와 패치들� 가져와서 리눅스 커� 메�� 리스트로
+온 많� 패치들과 한� 묶는다. � 트리는 새로운 기능들과 패치들� 위한
+장소를 제공하는 역할� 한다. 하나� 패치가 -mm� 한�안 있으면서 그 가치가
+�명�게 �면 Andrew나 서브시스템 메�트너는 그것� 메���� �함시키기
+위하여 Linus�게 보낸다.
+
+커� 트리� �함하고 싶� 모든 새로운 패치들� Linus�게 보내지기 전�
+-mm 트리�서 테스트를 하는 것� �극 추천한다.
+
+� 커�들� 안정�게 사용할 시스템�서� 실행하는 것� �합하지 않으며
+다른 브랜치들� 어떤 것들보다 위험하다.
+
+여러분� 커� 개발 프로세스를 �길 �한다면 � 커� 배�들� 사용하고
+테스트한 후 어떤 문제를 발견하거나 �는 모든 것� 잘 �작한다면 리눅스
+커� 메�� 리스트로 피드백� 해달�.
+
+� 커�들� �반�으로 모든 다른 실험�� 패치들과 배�� 당시�
+사용가능한 메��� -git 커�들� 몇몇 변경� �함한다.
+
+-mm 커�들� 정해진 �정대로 배��지 않는다. 하지만 대개 몇몇 -mm 커�들�
+� -rc 커�(1부터 3� �함) 사��서 배��다.
+
+서브시스템 커� 트리들과 패치들
+-------------------------------
+많� 다른 커� 서브시스템 개발�들� 커�� 다른 부분들�서 무슨 ��
+�어나고 있는지를 볼수 있�� 그들� 개발 트리를 공개한다. � 트리들�
+위�서 설명하였� 것 처럼 -mm 커� 배�들로 합�진다.
+
+다��  활용가능한 커� 트리들� 나열한다.
+  git trees:
+    - Kbuild development tree, Sam Ravnborg < sam@ravnborg.org>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git
+
+    - ACPI development tree, Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com >
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git
+
+    - Block development tree, Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git
+
+    - DRM development tree, Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git
+
+    - ia64 development tree, Tony Luck < tony.luck@intel.com>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git
+
+    - infiniband, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com >
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git
+
+    - libata, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git
+
+    - network drivers, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git
+
+    - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski < linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
+
+    - SCSI, James Bottomley < James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com>
+    git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
+
+  quilt trees:
+    - USB, PCI, Driver Core, and I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman < gregkh@suse.de>
+    kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
+    - x86-64, partly i386, Andi Kleen < ak@suse.de>
+        ftp.firstfloor.org:/pub/ak/x86_64/quilt/
+
+  다른 커� 트리들� http://kernel.org/git와 MAINTAINERS 파��서 참조할 수
+  있다.
+
+버그 보고
+---------
+bugzilla.kernel.org는 리눅스 커� 개발�들� 커�� 버그를 추�하는 곳�다.
+사용�들� 발견한 모든 버그들� 보고하기 위하여 � 툴� 사용할 것� 권장한다.
+kernel bugzilla를 사용하는 �세한 방법� 다�� 참조하�.
+    http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html
+
+메� 커� 소스 디렉토리� 있는 REPORTING-BUGS 파�� 커� 버그� 것 같�
+것� 보고하는는 법� 관한 좋� 템플릿�고 문제를 추�하기 위해서 커�
+개발�들� 필요로 하는 정보가 무엇들�지를 �세히 설명하고 있다.
+
+
+버그 리�트들� 관리
+--------------------
+
+여러분� 해킹 기술� 연습하는 가장 좋� 방법 중� 하는 다른 사람들�
+보고한 버그들� 수정하는 것�다. 여러분� 커�� �욱 안정화시키는�
+�움� 줄 �만� 아니� 실제있는 문제들� 수정하는 법� 배우게 �고
+그와 함께 여러분들� 기술� 향�� 것�며 다른 개발�들� 여러분�
+존재� 대해 알게 � 것�다. 버그를 수정하는 것� 개발�들  사��서
+�수를 얻� 수 있는 가장 좋� 방법중� 하나�다. 왜�하면 많� 사람들�
+다른 사람들� 버그들� 수정하기 위하여 시간� 낭비하지 않기 때문�다.
+
+�미 보고� 버그 리�트들� 가지고 작업하기 위해서 http://bugzilla.kernelorg를
+참조하�. 여러분� 앞으로 �겨날 버그 리�트들� 조언�가 �길 �한다면
+bugme-new 메�� 리스트나(새로운 버그 리�트들만� �곳�서 메�로 전해진다)
+bugme-janitor 메�� 리스트(bugzilla� 모든 변화들� 여기서 메�로 전해진다)
+� 등�하면 �다.
+
+      http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
+      http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
+
+
+
+메�� 리스트들
+---------------
+
+위� 몇몇 문서들� 설명하였지만 핵심 커� 개발�들� 대다수는
+리눅스 커� 메�� 리스트� 참여하고 있다. 리스트� 등�하고 해지하는
+방법� 관한 �세한 사항� 다��서 참조할 수 있다.
+    http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-kernel
+웹�� 많� 다른 곳�� 메�� 리스트� 아카�브들� 있다.
+�러한 아카�브들� 찾으려면 검색 엔진� 사용하�. 예를 들어:
+      http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel
+여러분� 새로운 문제� 관해 리스트� 올리기 전� �하고 싶� 주제� 대한
+것� 아카�브�서 먼저 찾기를 강력히 권장한다. �미 �세하게 토론� 많�
+것들� 메�� 리스트� 아카�브� 기��어 있다.
+
+��� 커� 서브시스템들� 대부분� �신들� 개발� 관한 노력들로 �루어진
+분리� 메�� 리스트를 따로 가지고 있다. 다른 그룹들� 무슨 리스트를 가지고
+있는지는 MAINTAINERS 파�� 참조하�.
+
+많� 리스트들� kernel.org�서 호스트�고 있다. 그 정보들� 다��서 참조� 수 있다.
+         http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
+
+리스트들� 사용할 때는 올바른 예절� 따를 것� 유�해�.
+대단하진 않지만 다� URL� 리스트(혹� 모든 리스트)와 대화하는 몇몇 간단한
+가�드��� 가지고 있다.
+         http://www.albion.com/netiquette/
+
+여러 사람들� 여러분� 메�� �답한다면 CC: 즉 수신 리스트는 꽤 커지게
+� 것�다. 아무 �유없� CC�서 어떤 사람� 제거하거나 리스트 주소로만
+회신하지 마�. 메�� 보낸 사람으로서 하나를 받고 리스트로부터 �
+하나를 받아 �번 받는 것� �숙하여 있으니 mail-header를 조작하려고 하지
+�아�. 사람들� 그런 것� 좋아하지 않� 것�다.
+
+여러분� 회신� 문맥� �래대로 유지해야 한다. 여러분들� 회신� 윗부분�
+"John 커�해커는 작성했다...."를 유지하며 여러분들� �견� 그 메�� 윗부분�
+작성하지 �고 � �용한 단�들 사�� 넣어�.
+
+여러분들� 패치들� 메�� 넣는다면 그것들� Documentation/SubmittingPatches�
+나와있는�로 명백히(plain) �� 수 있는 �스트여야 한다. 커� 개발�들�
+첨부파��나 압축� 패치들� �하지 않는다. 그들� 여러분들� 패치�
+� �� 단위로 코멘트를 하길 �하며 압축하거나 첨부하지 않고 보내는 것�
+그렇게 할 수 있는 유�한 방법�다. 여러분들� 사용하는 메� 프로그램�
+스페�스나 탭 문�들� 조작하지 않는지 확�하�. 가장 좋� 첫 테스트는
+메�� �신�게 보내보고 스스로 그 패치를 �용해보�. 그것� �작하지
+않는다면 여러분� 메� 프로그램� 고치�가 제대로 �작하는 프로그램으로
+바꾸어�.
+
+무엇보다� 메�� 리스트� 다른 구��들�게 보여주려 한다는 것� 기억하�.
+
+
+커뮤니티와 �하는 법
+--------------------
+
+커� 커뮤니티� 목�� 가능한한 가장 좋� 커�� 제공하는 것�다. 여러분�
+받아들여질 패치를 제출하게 �면 그 패치� 기술�� ��으로 검토� 것�다.
+그럼 여러분들� 무엇� 기대하고 있어야 하는가?
+ - 비�
+ - �견
+ - 변경� 위한 요구
+ - 당위성� 위한 요구
+ - ê³ ìš”
+
+기억하�. �것들� 여러분� 패치가 커�로 들어가기 위한 과정�다. 여러분�
+패치들� 비�과 다른 �견� 받� 수 있고 그것들� 기술�� 레벨로 �가하고
+재작업하거나 �는 왜 수정하면 안�는지� 관하여 명료하고 간결한 �유를
+�할 수 있어야 한다. 여러분� 제출한 것� 어떤 �답� 있지 않다면 몇 ��
+기다려보고 다시 시�해�. 때론 너무 많� 메�들 �� 묻혀버리기� 한다.
+
+여러분� 무엇� 해서는 안�는가?
+ - 여러분� 패치가 아무 질문 없� 받아들여지기를 기대하는 것
+ - 방어�� �는 것
+ - �견� 무시하는 것
+ - 요청� 변경� 하지 않고 패치를 다시 제출하는 것
+
+가능한한 가장 좋� 기술�� 해답� 찾고 있는 커뮤니티�서는 항�
+어떤 패치가 얼마나 좋�지� 관하여 다른 �견들� 있� 수 있다. 여러분�
+협조��어야 하고 기꺼� 여러분� ��� 커� 내� 맞추어야 한다. 아니면
+�어� 여러분� 것� 가치있다는 것� 중명하여야 한다. 잘못� 것� 여러분�
+올바른 방향� 해결책으로 ��어갈 �지가 있다면 받아들여질 것��는 ��
+기억하�.
+
+여러분� 첫 패치�  여러분� 수정해야하는 십여개 정�� 회신� 오는
+경우� �하다. �것� 여러분� 패치가 받아들여지지 않� 것��는 것�
+�미하는 것� 아니고 개��으로 여러분�게 �정� 있어서 그러는 것�
+아니다. 간단히 여러분� 패치� 제기� 문제들� 수정하고 그것� 다시
+보내�.
+
+
+커� 커뮤니티와 기업 조�간� 차��
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+커� 커뮤니티는 가장 전통�� 회사� 개발 환경과는 다르다. 여기� 여러분들�
+문제를 피하기 위한 목�� 있다.
+  여러분들� 제안한 변경들� 관하여 �할 때 좋� 것들 :
+    - " �것� 여러 문제들� 해겹합니다."
+    - "�것� 2000 ��� 코드를 제거합니다."
+    - "�것� 내가 �하려는 것� 관해 설명하는 패치입니다."
+    - "나는 5개� 다른 아키���서 그것� 테스트했슴으로..."
+    - "여기� �련� 작� 패치들� 있습�로..."
+    - "�것� �반�� 머신�서 성능� 향�시키므로..."
+
+  여러분들� �할 때 피해야 할 좋지 않� 것들 :
+    - "우리를 그것� AIT/ptx/Solaris�서 �러한 방법으로 했다. 그러므로 그것� 좋� 것임� 틀립없다..."
+    - "나는 20년�안 �것� 해왔다. 그러므로..."
+    - "�것� �� 벌기위해 나� 회사가 필요로 하는 것�다."
+    - "�것� 우리� 엔터프��즈 �품 ��� 위한 것�다."
+    - "여기� 나� ��� �하고 있는 1000 페�지 설계 문서가 있다."
+    - "나는 6달�안 �것� 했으니..."
+    - "여기세 5000�� 짜리 패치가 있으니..."
+    - "나는 현재 뒤죽박죽� 것� 재작성했다. 그리고 여기�..."
+    - "나는 마�시한� 가지고 있으므로 � 패치는 지금 �용� 필요가 있다."
+
+커� 커뮤니티가 전통�� 소프트웨어 엔지니어� 개발 환경들과
+� 다른 �� 얼굴� 보지 않고 �한다는 ��다. �메�과 irc를 대화�
+주요수단으로 사용하는 것� 한가지 장�� 성별�나 �종� 차별�
+없다는 것�다. 리눅스 커�� 작업 환경�서는 단지 �메� 주소만
+알수 있기 때문� 여성과 소수 민족들� 모� 받아들여진다. 국제�으로
+�하게 �는 측면� 사람� �름� 근거하여 성별� 추측할 수 없게
+하기때문�  차별� 없애는 � �움� 준다. Andrea�는 �름� 가진 남�와
+Pat��는 �름� 가진 여�가 있� 수� 있는 것�다. 리눅스 커��서
+작업하며 ��� 표현해왔� 대부분� 여성들� �정�� 경험� 가지고
+있다.
+
+언어 장벽� �어� �숙하지 않� 몇몇 사람들�게 문제가 � 수� 있다.
+ 언어� 훌륭한 구사는 메�� 리스트�서 올바르게 �신� ���
+표현하기 위하여 필요하다. 그래서 여러분� �메�� 보내기 전�
+�어를 올바르게 사용하고 있는지를 체�하는 것� 바람�하다.
+
+
+여러분� 변경� 나누어�
+------------------------
+
+리눅스 커� 커뮤니티는 한꺼번� 굉장히 � 코드� 묶�� 쉽게
+받아들�지 않는다. 변경� �절하게 소개�고, 검토�고, ���
+부분으로 작게 나누어져야 한다. �것� 회사�서 하는 것과는 정확히
+반대�는 것�다. 여러분들� 제안� 개발 초기� ��� 소개�야 한다.
+그래서 여러분들� �신� 하고 있는 것� 관하여 피드백� 받� 수 있게
+�다. 커뮤니티가 여러분들� 커뮤니티와 함께 �하고 있다는 것�
+���� 만들고 커뮤니티가 여러분� 기능� 위한 쓰레기 장으로서
+사용�지 않고 있다는 것� ��게 하�. 그러나 메�� 리스트� 한번�
+50개� �메�� 보내지는 �아�. 여러분들� �련� 패치들� 항�
+� 작아야 한다.
+
+패치를 나누는 �유는 다�과 같다.
+
+1) 작� 패치들� 여러분� 패치들� �용� 수 있는 확률� 높여준다.
+   왜�하면 다른 사람들� 정확성� 검�하기 위하여 많� 시간과 노력�
+   들�기를 �하지 않는다. 5줄� 패치는 메�트너가 거� 몇 초간 ��
+   보면 �용� 수 있다. 그러나 500 줄� 패치는 정확성� 검토하기 위하여
+   몇시간� 걸릴 수� 있다(걸리는 시간� 패치� �기 혹� 다른 것�
+   비례하여 기하급수�으로 늘어난다).
+
+   패치를 작게 만드는 것� 무엇�가 잘못�었� 때 디버그하는 것�
+   쉽게 만든다. 즉, 그렇게 만드는 것� 매우 � 패치를 �용한 후�
+   조사하는 것 보다 작� 패치를 �용한 후� (그리고 몇몇� 것�
+   깨졌� 때) 하나씩 패치들� 제거해가며 디버그 하기 쉽�� 만들어 준다.
+
+2) 작� 패치들� 보내는 것�만 아니� 패치들� 제출하기전� 재작성하고
+   간단하게(혹� 간단한게 재배치하여) 하는 것� 중요하다.
+
+여기� 커� 개발� Al Viro� �야기가 있다.
+    "학�� 수학 숙제를 채�하는 선�님� ��해보�. 선�님� 학�들�
+    답� 얻�때까지 겪� 시행착오를 보길 �하지 않는다. 선�님들�
+    간결하고 가장 뛰어난 답� 보길 �한다. 훌륭한 학�� �것� 알고
+    마지막으로 답� 얻기 전 중간 과정들� 제출하진 않는다.
+
+    커� 개발� 마찬가지�다. 메�트너들과 검토하는 사람들� 문제를
+    풀어나가는 과정�� 숨겨진 과정� 보길 �하진 않는다. 그들�
+    간결하고 멋진 답� 보길 �한다."
+
+커뮤니티와 함께 �하며 뛰어난 답� 찾고 여러분들� 완성�지 않� �들
+사�� 균형� 유지해야 하는 어려움� 있� 수 있다. 그러므로 프로세스�
+초반� 여러분� �� 향�시키기위한 피드백� 얻는 것 �만 아니�
+여러분들� 변경들� 작� 묶�으로 유지해서 심지어는 여러분� 작업�
+모든 부분� 지금� �함� 준비가 �어있지 않지만 작� 부분� �미
+받아들여질 수 있�� 유지하는 것� 바람�하다.
+
+�한 완성�지 않았고 "나중� 수정� 것�다." 와 같� 것들� �함하는
+패치들� 받아들여지지 않� 것��는 �� 유�하�.
+
+변경� 정당화해�
+-----------------
+
+여러분들� 나누어진 패치들� 리눅스 커뮤니티가 왜 반�해야 하는지를
+알�� 하는 것� 매우 중요하다. 새로운 기능들� 필요하고 유용하다는
+것� 반드시 그� 맞는 �유가 있어야 한다.
+
+
+변경� 문서화해�
+-----------------
+
+여러분� 패치를 보내려 할때는 여러분� 무엇� �하려고 하는지를 충분히
+��하여 �메�� 작성해야 한다. � 정보는 패치를 위한 ChangeLog가 �
+것�다. 그리고 항� 그 내용� 보길 �하는 모든 사람들� 위해 보존�
+것�다. 패치는 완벽하게 다�과 같� 내용들� �함하여 설명해야 한다.
+  - 변경� 왜 필요한지
+  - 패치� 관한 전체 설계 어프로치
+  - 구현 �세들
+  - 테스트 결과들
+
+�것� 무엇�지 � �세한 것� 알고 싶다면 다� 문서� ChageLog 항� ��.
+   "The Perfect Patch"
+    http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt
+
+
+
+
+� 모든 것� 하는 것� 매우 어려운 ��다. 완벽히 소화하는 �는 �어� 몇년�
+걸릴 수� 있다. 많� �내와 결�가 필요한 계��는 개선� 과정�다. 그러나
+가능한한 �기하지 ��. 많� 사람들� �전부터 해왔� 것�고 그 사람들�
+정확하게 여러분들� 지금 서 있는 그 곳부터  시작했었다.
+
+
+
+
+----------
+"개발 프로세스"(http://linux.tar.gz/articles/2.6-development_process) 섹션�
+작성하는� 있어 참고할 문서를 사용하�� 허�해준 Paolo Ciarrocchi�게
+�사한다. 여러분들� �해야 할 것과 �해서는 안�는 것� 목� 중 �부를 제공해준
+Randy Dunlap과 Gerrit Huizenga�게 �사한다. �한 검토와 �견 그리고
+공헌� 아�지 않� Pat Mochel, Hanna Linder, Randy Dunlap, Kay Sievers,
+Vojtech Pavlik, Jan Kara, Josh Boyer, Kees Cook, Andrew Morton, Andi Kleen,
+Vadim Lobanov, Jesper Juhl, Adrian Bunk, Keri Harris, Frans Pop,
+David A. Wheeler, Junio Hamano, Michael Kerrisk, and Alex Shepard�게� �사를 전한다.
+그들� �움� 없었다면 � 문서는 존재하지 않았� 것�다.
+
+
+
+메�트너: Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt
index 8ee49ee7c963..ca86a885ad8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/kobject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt
@@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ embedded in larger data structures and replace fields they duplicate.
 
 struct kobject {
         const char              * k_name;
-        char                    name[KOBJ_NAME_LEN];
         struct kref             kref;
         struct list_head        entry;
         struct kobject          * parent;
@@ -223,18 +222,15 @@ decl_subsys(devices, &ktype_device, &device_uevent_ops);
 is equivalent to doing:
 
 struct kset devices_subsys = {
-     .kobj = {
-           .name = "devices",
-     },
      .ktype = &ktype_devices,
      .uevent_ops = &device_uevent_ops,
 };
-
+kobject_set_name(&devices_subsys, name);
 
 The objects that are registered with a subsystem that use the
 subsystem's default list must have their kset ptr set properly. These
 objects may have embedded kobjects or ksets. The
-following helpers make setting the kset easier:
+following helper makes setting the kset easier:
 
 
 kobj_set_kset_s(obj,subsys)
@@ -242,22 +238,8 @@ kobj_set_kset_s(obj,subsys)
 - Assumes that obj->kobj exists, and is a struct kobject.
 - Sets the kset of that kobject to the kset <subsys>.
 
-
-kset_set_kset_s(obj,subsys)
-
-- Assumes that obj->kset exists, and is a struct kset.
-- Sets the kset of the embedded kobject to the kset <subsys>.
-
-subsys_set_kset(obj,subsys)
-
-- Assumes obj->subsys exists, and is a struct subsystem.
-- Sets obj->subsys.kset.kobj.kset to the subsystem's embedded kset.
-
-void subsystem_init(struct kset *s);
 int subsystem_register(struct kset *s);
 void subsystem_unregister(struct kset *s);
-struct kset *subsys_get(struct kset *s);
-void kset_put(struct kset *s);
 
 These are just wrappers around the respective kset_* functions.
 
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
index f7918401a007..103e346c8b6a 100644
--- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
+++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ typedef uint32_t u32;
 typedef uint16_t u16;
 typedef uint8_t u8;
 #include "../../include/linux/lguest_launcher.h"
-#include "../../include/asm-i386/e820.h"
+#include "../../include/asm-x86/e820_32.h"
 /*:*/
 
 #define PAGE_PRESENT 0x7        /* Present, RW, Execute */
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ static u32 handle_block_output(int fd, const struct iovec *iov,
                  * of the block file (possibly extending it). */
                 if (off + len > device_len) {
                         /* Trim it back to the correct length */
-                        ftruncate(dev->fd, device_len);
+                        ftruncate64(dev->fd, device_len);
                         /* Die, bad Guest, die. */
                         errx(1, "Write past end %llu+%u", off, len);
                 }
diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4ba4664ce5c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+
+LOCK STATISTICS
+
+- WHAT
+
+As the name suggests, it provides statistics on locks.
+
+- WHY
+
+Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance.
+
+- HOW
+
+Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to
+lock classes. We build on that. The graph below shows the relation between
+the lock functions and the various hooks therein.
+
+        __acquire
+            |
+           lock _____
+            |        \
+            |    __contended
+            |         |
+            |       <wait>
+            | _______/
+            |/
+            |
+       __acquired
+            |
+            .
+          <hold>
+            .
+            |
+       __release
+            |
+         unlock
+
+lock, unlock    - the regular lock functions
+__*             - the hooks
+<>              - states
+
+With these hooks we provide the following statistics:
+
+ con-bounces       - number of lock contention that involved x-cpu data
+ contentions       - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait
+ wait time min     - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock
+           max     - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock
+           total   - total time we spend waiting on this lock
+ acq-bounces       - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data
+ acquisitions      - number of times we took the lock
+ hold time min     - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock
+           max     - longest time we ever held the lock
+           total   - total time this lock was held
+
+From these number various other statistics can be derived, such as:
+
+ hold time average = hold time total / acquisitions
+
+These numbers are gathered per lock class, per read/write state (when
+applicable).
+
+It also tracks 4 contention points per class. A contention point is a call site
+that had to wait on lock acquisition.
+
+ - USAGE
+
+Look at the current lock statistics:
+
+( line numbers not part of actual output, done for clarity in the explanation
+  below )
+
+# less /proc/lock_stat
+
+01 lock_stat version 0.2
+02 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+03                               class name    con-bounces    contentions   waittime-min   waittime-max waittime-total    acq-bounces   acquisitions   holdtime-min   holdtime-max holdtime-total
+04 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+05
+06               &inode->i_data.tree_lock-W:            15          21657           0.18     1093295.30 11547131054.85             58          10415           0.16          87.51        6387.60
+07               &inode->i_data.tree_lock-R:             0              0           0.00           0.00           0.00          23302         231198           0.25           8.45       98023.38
+08               --------------------------
+09                 &inode->i_data.tree_lock              0          [<ffffffff8027c08f>] add_to_page_cache+0x5f/0x190
+10
+11 ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
+12
+13                              dcache_lock:          1037           1161           0.38          45.32         774.51           6611         243371           0.15         306.48       77387.24
+14                              -----------
+15                              dcache_lock            180          [<ffffffff802c0d7e>] sys_getcwd+0x11e/0x230
+16                              dcache_lock            165          [<ffffffff802c002a>] d_alloc+0x15a/0x210
+17                              dcache_lock             33          [<ffffffff8035818d>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x4d/0x70
+18                              dcache_lock              1          [<ffffffff802beef8>] shrink_dcache_parent+0x18/0x130
+
+This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the
+output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04
+show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-10 and 13-18 show the actual
+statistics. These statistics come in two parts; the actual stats separated by a
+short separator (line 08, 14) from the contention points.
+
+The first lock (05-10) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the
+short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors,
+they have two: contentions and [<IP>] symbol.
+
+
+View the top contending locks:
+
+# grep : /proc/lock_stat | head
+              &inode->i_data.tree_lock-W:            15          21657           0.18     1093295.30 11547131054.85             58          10415           0.16          87.51        6387.60
+              &inode->i_data.tree_lock-R:             0              0           0.00           0.00           0.00          23302         231198           0.25           8.45       98023.38
+                             dcache_lock:          1037           1161           0.38          45.32         774.51           6611         243371           0.15         306.48       77387.24
+                         &inode->i_mutex:           161            286 18446744073709       62882.54     1244614.55           3653          20598 18446744073709       62318.60     1693822.74
+                         &zone->lru_lock:            94             94           0.53           7.33          92.10           4366          32690           0.29          59.81       16350.06
+              &inode->i_data.i_mmap_lock:            79             79           0.40           3.77          53.03          11779          87755           0.28         116.93       29898.44
+                        &q->__queue_lock:            48             50           0.52          31.62          86.31            774          13131           0.17         113.08       12277.52
+                        &rq->rq_lock_key:            43             47           0.74          68.50         170.63           3706          33929           0.22         107.99       17460.62
+                      &rq->rq_lock_key#2:            39             46           0.75           6.68          49.03           2979          32292           0.17         125.17       17137.63
+                         tasklist_lock-W:            15             15           1.45          10.87          32.70           1201           7390           0.58          62.55       13648.47
+
+Clear the statistics:
+
+# echo 0 > /proc/lock_stat
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
index d63f480afb74..153d84d281e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
@@ -96,6 +96,9 @@ routing.txt
         - the new routing mechanism
 shaper.txt
         - info on the module that can shape/limit transmitted traffic.
+sk98lin.txt
+        - Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx compliant Gigabit
+          Ethernet Adapter family driver info
 skfp.txt
         - SysKonnect FDDI (SK-5xxx, Compaq Netelligent) driver info.
 smc9.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7907435a661c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/NAPI_HOWTO.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,766 +0,0 @@
-HISTORY:
-February 16/2002 -- revision 0.2.1:
-COR typo corrected
-February 10/2002 -- revision 0.2:
-some spell checking ;->
-January 12/2002 -- revision 0.1
-This is still work in progress so may change.
-To keep up to date please watch this space.
-
-Introduction to NAPI
-====================
-
-NAPI is a proven (www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz) technique
-to improve network performance on Linux. For more details please
-read that paper.
-NAPI provides a "inherent mitigation" which is bound by system capacity
-as can be seen from the following data collected by Robert on Gigabit 
-ethernet (e1000):
-
- Psize    Ipps       Tput     Rxint     Txint    Done     Ndone
- ---------------------------------------------------------------
-   60    890000     409362        17     27622        7     6823
-  128    758150     464364        21      9301       10     7738
-  256    445632     774646        42     15507       21    12906
-  512    232666     994445    241292     19147   241192     1062
- 1024    119061    1000003    872519     19258   872511        0
- 1440     85193    1000003    946576     19505   946569        0
- 
-
-Legend:
-"Ipps" stands for input packets per second. 
-"Tput" == packets out of total 1M that made it out.
-"txint" == transmit completion interrupts seen
-"Done" == The number of times that the poll() managed to pull all
-packets out of the rx ring. Note from this that the lower the
-load the more we could clean up the rxring
-"Ndone" == is the converse of "Done". Note again, that the higher
-the load the more times we couldn't clean up the rxring.
-
-Observe that:
-when the NIC receives 890Kpackets/sec only 17 rx interrupts are generated. 
-The system cant handle the processing at 1 interrupt/packet at that load level. 
-At lower rates on the other hand, rx interrupts go up and therefore the
-interrupt/packet ratio goes up (as observable from that table). So there is
-possibility that under low enough input, you get one poll call for each
-input packet caused by a single interrupt each time. And if the system 
-cant handle interrupt per packet ratio of 1, then it will just have to 
-chug along ....
-
-
-0) Prerequisites:
-==================
-A driver MAY continue using the old 2.4 technique for interfacing
-to the network stack and not benefit from the NAPI changes.
-NAPI additions to the kernel do not break backward compatibility.
-NAPI, however, requires the following features to be available:
-
-A) DMA ring or enough RAM to store packets in software devices.
-
-B) Ability to turn off interrupts or maybe events that send packets up 
-the stack.
-
-NAPI processes packet events in what is known as dev->poll() method.
-Typically, only packet receive events are processed in dev->poll(). 
-The rest of the events MAY be processed by the regular interrupt handler 
-to reduce processing latency (justified also because there are not that 
-many of them).
-Note, however, NAPI does not enforce that dev->poll() only processes 
-receive events. 
-Tests with the tulip driver indicated slightly increased latency if
-all of the interrupt handler is moved to dev->poll(). Also MII handling
-gets a little trickier.
-The example used in this document is to move the receive processing only
-to dev->poll(); this is shown with the patch for the tulip driver.
-For an example of code that moves all the interrupt driver to 
-dev->poll() look at the ported e1000 code.
-
-There are caveats that might force you to go with moving everything to 
-dev->poll(). Different NICs work differently depending on their status/event 
-acknowledgement setup. 
-There are two types of event register ACK mechanisms.
-        I)  what is known as Clear-on-read (COR).
-        when you read the status/event register, it clears everything!
-        The natsemi and sunbmac NICs are known to do this.
-        In this case your only choice is to move all to dev->poll()
-
-        II) Clear-on-write (COW)
-         i) you clear the status by writing a 1 in the bit-location you want.
-                These are the majority of the NICs and work the best with NAPI.
-                Put only receive events in dev->poll(); leave the rest in
-                the old interrupt handler.
-         ii) whatever you write in the status register clears every thing ;->
-                Cant seem to find any supported by Linux which do this. If
-                someone knows such a chip email us please.
-                Move all to dev->poll()
-
-C) Ability to detect new work correctly.
-NAPI works by shutting down event interrupts when there's work and
-turning them on when there's none. 
-New packets might show up in the small window while interrupts were being 
-re-enabled (refer to appendix 2).  A packet might sneak in during the period 
-we are enabling interrupts. We only get to know about such a packet when the 
-next new packet arrives and generates an interrupt. 
-Essentially, there is a small window of opportunity for a race condition
-which for clarity we'll refer to as the "rotting packet".
-
-This is a very important topic and appendix 2 is dedicated for more 
-discussion.
-
-Locking rules and environmental guarantees
-==========================================
-
--Guarantee: Only one CPU at any time can call dev->poll(); this is because
-only one CPU can pick the initial interrupt and hence the initial
-netif_rx_schedule(dev);
-- The core layer invokes devices to send packets in a round robin format.
-This implies receive is totally lockless because of the guarantee that only 
-one CPU is executing it.
--  contention can only be the result of some other CPU accessing the rx
-ring. This happens only in close() and suspend() (when these methods
-try to clean the rx ring); 
-****guarantee: driver authors need not worry about this; synchronization 
-is taken care for them by the top net layer.
--local interrupts are enabled (if you dont move all to dev->poll()). For 
-example link/MII and txcomplete continue functioning just same old way. 
-This improves the latency of processing these events. It is also assumed that 
-the receive interrupt is the largest cause of noise. Note this might not 
-always be true. 
-[according to Manfred Spraul, the winbond insists on sending one 
-txmitcomplete interrupt for each packet (although this can be mitigated)].
-For these broken drivers, move all to dev->poll().
-
-For the rest of this text, we'll assume that dev->poll() only
-processes receive events.
-
-new methods introduce by NAPI
-=============================
-
-a) netif_rx_schedule(dev)
-Called by an IRQ handler to schedule a poll for device
-
-b) netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev)
-puts the device in a state which allows for it to be added to the
-CPU polling list if it is up and running. You can look at this as
-the first half of  netif_rx_schedule(dev) above; the second half
-being c) below.
-
-c) __netif_rx_schedule(dev)
-Add device to the poll list for this CPU; assuming that _prep above
-has already been called and returned 1.
-
-d) netif_rx_reschedule(dev, undo)
-Called to reschedule polling for device specifically for some
-deficient hardware. Read Appendix 2 for more details.
-
-e) netif_rx_complete(dev)
-
-Remove interface from the CPU poll list: it must be in the poll list
-on current cpu. This primitive is called by dev->poll(), when
-it completes its work. The device cannot be out of poll list at this
-call, if it is then clearly it is a BUG(). You'll know ;->
-
-All of the above methods are used below, so keep reading for clarity.
-
-Device driver changes to be made when porting NAPI
-==================================================
-
-Below we describe what kind of changes are required for NAPI to work.
-
-1) introduction of dev->poll() method 
-=====================================
-
-This is the method that is invoked by the network core when it requests
-for new packets from the driver. A driver is allowed to send upto
-dev->quota packets by the current CPU before yielding to the network
-subsystem (so other devices can also get opportunity to send to the stack).
-
-dev->poll() prototype looks as follows:
-int my_poll(struct net_device *dev, int *budget)
-
-budget is the remaining number of packets the network subsystem on the
-current CPU can send up the stack before yielding to other system tasks.
-*Each driver is responsible for decrementing budget by the total number of
-packets sent.
-        Total number of packets cannot exceed dev->quota.
-
-dev->poll() method is invoked by the top layer, the driver just sends if it 
-can to the stack the packet quantity requested.
-
-more on dev->poll() below after the interrupt changes are explained.
-
-2) registering dev->poll() method
-===================================
-
-dev->poll should be set in the dev->probe() method. 
-e.g:
-dev->open = my_open;
-.
-.
-/* two new additions */
-/* first register my poll method */
-dev->poll = my_poll;
-/* next register my weight/quanta; can be overridden in /proc */
-dev->weight = 16;
-.
-.
-dev->stop = my_close;
-
-
-
-3) scheduling dev->poll()
-=============================
-This involves modifying the interrupt handler and the code
-path which takes the packet off the NIC and sends them to the 
-stack.
-
-it's important at this point to introduce the classical D Becker 
-interrupt processor:
-
-------------------
-static irqreturn_t
-netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs)
-{
-
-        struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance;
-        struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv;
-
-        int work_count = my_work_count;
-        status = read_interrupt_status_reg();
-        if (status == 0)
-                return IRQ_NONE; /* Shared IRQ: not us */
-        if (status == 0xffff)
-                return IRQ_HANDLED;      /* Hot unplug */
-        if (status & error)
-                do_some_error_handling()
-        
-        do {
-                acknowledge_ints_ASAP();
-
-                if (status & link_interrupt) {
-                        spin_lock(&tp->link_lock);
-                        do_some_link_stat_stuff();
-                        spin_lock(&tp->link_lock);
-                }
-                
-                if (status & rx_interrupt) {
-                        receive_packets(dev);
-                }
-
-                if (status & rx_nobufs) {
-                        make_rx_buffs_avail();
-                }
-                        
-                if (status & tx_related) {
-                        spin_lock(&tp->lock);
-                        tx_ring_free(dev);
-                        if (tx_died)
-                                restart_tx();
-                        spin_unlock(&tp->lock);
-                }
-
-                status = read_interrupt_status_reg();
-
-        } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done);
-        return IRQ_HANDLED;
-}
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-We now change this to what is shown below to NAPI-enable it:
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-static irqreturn_t
-netdevice_interrupt(int irq, void *dev_id, struct pt_regs *regs)
-{
-        struct net_device *dev = (struct net_device *)dev_instance;
-        struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv;
-
-        status = read_interrupt_status_reg();
-        if (status == 0)
-                return IRQ_NONE;         /* Shared IRQ: not us */
-        if (status == 0xffff)
-                return IRQ_HANDLED;         /* Hot unplug */
-        if (status & error)
-                do_some_error_handling();
-        
-        do {
-/************************ start note *********************************/         
-                acknowledge_ints_ASAP();  // dont ack rx and rxnobuff here
-/************************ end note *********************************/           
-
-                if (status & link_interrupt) {
-                        spin_lock(&tp->link_lock);
-                        do_some_link_stat_stuff();
-                        spin_unlock(&tp->link_lock);
-                }
-/************************ start note *********************************/         
-                if (status & rx_interrupt || (status & rx_nobuffs)) {
-                        if (netif_rx_schedule_prep(dev)) {
-
-                                /* disable interrupts caused 
-                                 *      by arriving packets */
-                                disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints();
-                                /* tell system we have work to be done. */
-                                __netif_rx_schedule(dev);
-                        } else {
-                                printk("driver bug! interrupt while in poll\n");
-                                /* FIX by disabling interrupts  */
-                                disable_rx_and_rxnobuff_ints();
-                        }
-                }
-/************************ end note note *********************************/              
-                        
-                if (status & tx_related) {
-                        spin_lock(&tp->lock);
-                        tx_ring_free(dev);
-
-                        if (tx_died)
-                                restart_tx();
-                        spin_unlock(&tp->lock);
-                }
-
-                status = read_interrupt_status_reg();
-
-/************************ start note *********************************/         
-        } while (!(status & error) || more_work_to_be_done(status));
-/************************ end note note *********************************/              
-        return IRQ_HANDLED;
-}
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-We note several things from above:
-
-I) Any interrupt source which is caused by arriving packets is now
-turned off when it occurs. Depending on the hardware, there could be
-several reasons that arriving packets would cause interrupts; these are the
-interrupt sources we wish to avoid. The two common ones are a) a packet 
-arriving (rxint) b) a packet arriving and finding no DMA buffers available
-(rxnobuff) .
-This means also acknowledge_ints_ASAP() will not clear the status
-register for those two items above; clearing is done in the place where 
-proper work is done within NAPI; at the poll() and refill_rx_ring() 
-discussed further below.
-netif_rx_schedule_prep() returns 1 if device is in running state and
-gets successfully added to the core poll list. If we get a zero value
-we can _almost_ assume are already added to the list (instead of not running. 
-Logic based on the fact that you shouldn't get interrupt if not running)
-We rectify this by disabling rx and rxnobuf interrupts.
-
-II) that receive_packets(dev) and make_rx_buffs_avail() may have disappeared.
-These functionalities are still around actually......
-
-infact, receive_packets(dev) is very close to my_poll() and 
-make_rx_buffs_avail() is invoked from my_poll()
-
-4) converting receive_packets() to dev->poll()
-===============================================
-
-We need to convert the classical D Becker receive_packets(dev) to my_poll()
-
-First the typical receive_packets() below:
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-/* this is called by interrupt handler */
-static void receive_packets (struct net_device *dev)
-{
-
-        struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv;
-        rx_ring = tp->rx_ring;
-        cur_rx = tp->cur_rx;
-        int entry = cur_rx % RX_RING_SIZE;
-        int received = 0;
-        int rx_work_limit = tp->dirty_rx + RX_RING_SIZE - tp->cur_rx;
-
-        while (rx_ring_not_empty) {
-                u32 rx_status;
-                unsigned int rx_size;
-                unsigned int pkt_size;
-                struct sk_buff *skb;
-                /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */
-                /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */
-                rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset));
-                rx_size = rx_status >> 16;
-                pkt_size = rx_size - 4;
-
-                /* process errors */
-                if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) ||
-                    (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) {
-                        netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr);
-                        return;
-                }
-
-                if (--rx_work_limit < 0)
-                        break;
-
-                /* grab a skb */
-                skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2);
-                if (skb) {
-                        .
-                        .
-                        netif_rx (skb);
-                        .
-                        .
-                } else {  /* OOM */
-                        /*seems very driver specific ... some just pass
-                        whatever is on the ring already. */
-                }
-
-                /* move to the next skb on the ring */
-                entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE;
-                received++ ;
-
-        }
-
-        /* store current ring pointer state */
-        tp->cur_rx = cur_rx;
-
-        /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */
-        refill_rx_ring();
-        .
-        .
-
-}
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-We change it to a new one below; note the additional parameter in
-the call.
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-/* this is called by the network core */
-static int my_poll (struct net_device *dev, int *budget)
-{
-
-        struct my_private *tp = (struct my_private *)dev->priv;
-        rx_ring = tp->rx_ring;
-        cur_rx = tp->cur_rx;
-        int entry = cur_rx % RX_BUF_LEN;
-        /* maximum packets to send to the stack */
-/************************ note note *********************************/          
-        int rx_work_limit = dev->quota;
-
-/************************ end note note *********************************/              
-    do {  // outer beginning loop starts here
-
-        clear_rx_status_register_bit();
-
-        while (rx_ring_not_empty) {
-                u32 rx_status;
-                unsigned int rx_size;
-                unsigned int pkt_size;
-                struct sk_buff *skb;
-                /* read size+status of next frame from DMA ring buffer */
-                /* the number 16 and 4 are just examples */
-                rx_status = le32_to_cpu (*(u32 *) (rx_ring + ring_offset));
-                rx_size = rx_status >> 16;
-                pkt_size = rx_size - 4;
-
-                /* process errors */
-                if ((rx_size > (MAX_ETH_FRAME_SIZE+4)) ||
-                    (!(rx_status & RxStatusOK))) {
-                        netdrv_rx_err (rx_status, dev, tp, ioaddr);
-                        return 1;
-                }
-
-/************************ note note *********************************/          
-                if (--rx_work_limit < 0) { /* we got packets, but no quota */
-                        /* store current ring pointer state */
-                        tp->cur_rx = cur_rx;
-
-                        /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */
-                        refill_rx_ring(dev);
-                        goto not_done;
-                }
-/**********************  end note **********************************/
-
-                /* grab a skb */
-                skb = dev_alloc_skb (pkt_size + 2);
-                if (skb) {
-                        .
-                        .
-/************************ note note *********************************/          
-                        netif_receive_skb (skb);
-/**********************  end note **********************************/
-                        .
-                        .
-                } else {  /* OOM */
-                        /*seems very driver specific ... common is just pass
-                        whatever is on the ring already. */
-                }
-
-                /* move to the next skb on the ring */
-                entry = (++tp->cur_rx) % RX_RING_SIZE;
-                received++ ;
-
-        }
-
-        /* store current ring pointer state */
-        tp->cur_rx = cur_rx;
-
-        /* Refill the Rx ring buffers if they are needed */
-        refill_rx_ring(dev);
-        
-        /* no packets on ring; but new ones can arrive since we last 
-           checked  */
-        status = read_interrupt_status_reg();
-        if (rx status is not set) {
-                        /* If something arrives in this narrow window,
-                        an interrupt will be generated */
-                        goto done;
-        }
-        /* done! at least that's what it looks like ;->
-        if new packets came in after our last check on status bits
-        they'll be caught by the while check and we go back and clear them 
-        since we havent exceeded our quota */
-    } while (rx_status_is_set); 
-
-done:
-
-/************************ note note *********************************/          
-        dev->quota -= received;
-        *budget -= received;
-
-        /* If RX ring is not full we are out of memory. */
-        if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL)
-                goto oom;
-
-        /* we are happy/done, no more packets on ring; put us back
-        to where we can start processing interrupts again */
-        netif_rx_complete(dev);
-        enable_rx_and_rxnobuf_ints();
-
-       /* The last op happens after poll completion. Which means the following:
-        * 1. it can race with disabling irqs in irq handler (which are done to 
-        * schedule polls)
-        * 2. it can race with dis/enabling irqs in other poll threads
-        * 3. if an irq raised after the beginning of the outer beginning 
-        * loop (marked in the code above), it will be immediately
-        * triggered here.
-        *
-        * Summarizing: the logic may result in some redundant irqs both
-        * due to races in masking and due to too late acking of already
-        * processed irqs. The good news: no events are ever lost.
-        */
-
-        return 0;   /* done */
-
-not_done:
-        if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 ||
-            tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL)
-                refill_rx_ring(dev);
-
-        if (!received) {
-                printk("received==0\n");
-                received = 1;
-        }
-        dev->quota -= received;
-        *budget -= received;
-        return 1;  /* not_done */
-
-oom:
-        /* Start timer, stop polling, but do not enable rx interrupts. */
-        start_poll_timer(dev);
-        return 0;  /* we'll take it from here so tell core "done"*/
-
-/************************ End note note *********************************/              
-}
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-From above we note that:
-0) rx_work_limit = dev->quota 
-1) refill_rx_ring() is in charge of clearing the bit for rxnobuff when
-it does the work.
-2) We have a done and not_done state.
-3) instead of netif_rx() we call netif_receive_skb() to pass the skb.
-4) we have a new way of handling oom condition
-5) A new outer for (;;) loop has been added. This serves the purpose of
-ensuring that if a new packet has come in, after we are all set and done,
-and we have not exceeded our quota that we continue sending packets up.
- 
-
------------------------------------------------------------
-Poll timer code will need to do the following:
-
-a) 
-
-        if (tp->cur_rx - tp->dirty_rx > RX_RING_SIZE/2 ||
-            tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL) 
-                refill_rx_ring(dev);
-
-        /* If RX ring is not full we are still out of memory.
-           Restart the timer again. Else we re-add ourselves 
-           to the master poll list.
-         */
-
-        if (tp->rx_buffers[tp->dirty_rx % RX_RING_SIZE].skb == NULL)
-                restart_timer();
-
-        else netif_rx_schedule(dev);  /* we are back on the poll list */
-        
-5) dev->close() and dev->suspend() issues
-==========================================
-The driver writer needn't worry about this; the top net layer takes
-care of it.
-
-6) Adding new Stats to /proc 
-=============================
-In order to debug some of the new features, we introduce new stats
-that need to be collected.
-TODO: Fill this later.
-
-APPENDIX 1: discussion on using ethernet HW FC
-==============================================
-Most chips with FC only send a pause packet when they run out of Rx buffers.
-Since packets are pulled off the DMA ring by a softirq in NAPI,
-if the system is slow in grabbing them and we have a high input
-rate (faster than the system's capacity to remove packets), then theoretically
-there will only be one rx interrupt for all packets during a given packetstorm.
-Under low load, we might have a single interrupt per packet.
-FC should be programmed to apply in the case when the system cant pull out
-packets fast enough i.e send a pause only when you run out of rx buffers.
-Note FC in itself is a good solution but we have found it to not be
-much of a commodity feature (both in NICs and switches) and hence falls
-under the same category as using NIC based mitigation. Also, experiments
-indicate that it's much harder to resolve the resource allocation
-issue (aka lazy receiving that NAPI offers) and hence quantify its usefulness
-proved harder. In any case, FC works even better with NAPI but is not
-necessary.
-
-
-APPENDIX 2: the "rotting packet" race-window avoidance scheme 
-=============================================================
-
-There are two types of associations seen here
-
-1) status/int which honors level triggered IRQ
-
-If a status bit for receive or rxnobuff is set and the corresponding 
-interrupt-enable bit is not on, then no interrupts will be generated. However, 
-as soon as the "interrupt-enable" bit is unmasked, an immediate interrupt is 
-generated.  [assuming the status bit was not turned off].
-Generally the concept of level triggered IRQs in association with a status and
-interrupt-enable CSR register set is used to avoid the race.
-
-If we take the example of the tulip:
-"pending work" is indicated by the status bit(CSR5 in tulip).
-the corresponding interrupt bit (CSR7 in tulip) might be turned off (but
-the CSR5 will continue to be turned on with new packet arrivals even if
-we clear it the first time)
-Very important is the fact that if we turn on the interrupt bit on when
-status is set that an immediate irq is triggered.
- 
-If we cleared the rx ring and proclaimed there was "no more work
-to be done" and then went on to do a few other things;  then when we enable
-interrupts, there is a possibility that a new packet might sneak in during
-this phase. It helps to look at the pseudo code for the tulip poll
-routine:
-
---------------------------
-        do {
-                ACK;
-                while (ring_is_not_empty()) {
-                        work-work-work
-                        if quota is exceeded: exit, no touching irq status/mask
-                }
-                /* No packets, but new can arrive while we are doing this*/
-                CSR5 := read
-                if (CSR5 is not set) {
-                        /* If something arrives in this narrow window here,
-                        *  where the comments are ;-> irq will be generated */
-                        unmask irqs;
-                        exit poll;
-                }
-        } while (rx_status_is_set);
-------------------------
-
-CSR5 bit of interest is only the rx status. 
-If you look at the last if statement: 
-you just finished grabbing all the packets from the rx ring .. you check if
-status bit says there are more packets just in ... it says none; you then
-enable rx interrupts again; if a new packet just came in during this check,
-we are counting that CSR5 will be set in that small window of opportunity
-and that by re-enabling interrupts, we would actually trigger an interrupt
-to register the new packet for processing.
-
-[The above description nay be very verbose, if you have better wording 
-that will make this more understandable, please suggest it.]
-
-2) non-capable hardware
-
-These do not generally respect level triggered IRQs. Normally,
-irqs may be lost while being masked and the only way to leave poll is to do
-a double check for new input after netif_rx_complete() is invoked
-and re-enable polling (after seeing this new input).
-
-Sample code:
-
----------
-        .
-        .
-restart_poll:
-        while (ring_is_not_empty()) {
-                work-work-work
-                if quota is exceeded: exit, not touching irq status/mask
-        }
-        .
-        .
-        .
-        enable_rx_interrupts()
-        netif_rx_complete(dev);
-        if (ring_has_new_packet() && netif_rx_reschedule(dev, received)) {
-                disable_rx_and_rxnobufs()
-                goto restart_poll
-        } while (rx_status_is_set);
----------
-                
-Basically netif_rx_complete() removes us from the poll list, but because a
-new packet which will never be caught due to the possibility of a race
-might come in, we attempt to re-add ourselves to the poll list. 
-
-
-
-
-APPENDIX 3: Scheduling issues.
-==============================
-As seen NAPI moves processing to softirq level. Linux uses the ksoftirqd as the 
-general solution to schedule softirq's to run before next interrupt and by putting 
-them under scheduler control. Also this prevents consecutive softirq's from 
-monopolize the CPU. This also have the effect that the priority of ksoftirq needs 
-to be considered when running very CPU-intensive applications and networking to
-get the proper balance of softirq/user balance. Increasing ksoftirq priority to 0 
-(eventually more) is reported cure problems with low network performance at high 
-CPU load.
-
-Most used processes in a GIGE router:
-USER       PID %CPU %MEM  SIZE   RSS TTY STAT START   TIME COMMAND
-root         3  0.2  0.0     0     0  ?  RWN Aug 15 602:00 (ksoftirqd_CPU0)
-root       232  0.0  7.9 41400 40884  ?  S   Aug 15  74:12 gated 
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-relevant sites:
-==================
-ftp://robur.slu.se/pub/Linux/net-development/NAPI/
-
-
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-TODO: Write net-skeleton.c driver.
--------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Authors:
-========
-Alexey Kuznetsov <kuznet@ms2.inr.ac.ru>
-Jamal Hadi Salim <hadi@cyberus.ca>
-Robert Olsson <Robert.Olsson@data.slu.se>
-
-Acknowledgements:
-================
-People who made this document better:
-
-Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@gnu.org>
-Andrew Morton  <akpm@zip.com.au>
-Manfred Spraul <manfred@colorfullife.com>
-Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com>
-Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
index 4504cc59e405..afb66f9a8aff 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
@@ -38,8 +38,13 @@ Socket options
 DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of
 service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set,
 the socket will fall back to 0 (which means that no meaningful service code
-is present). Connecting sockets set at most one service option; for
-listening sockets, multiple service codes can be specified.
+is present). On active sockets this is set before connect(); specifying more
+than one code has no effect (all subsequent service codes are ignored). The
+case is different for passive sockets, where multiple service codes (up to 32)
+can be set before calling bind().
+
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet
+size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14.
 
 DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV and DCCP_SOCKOPT_RECV_CSCOV are used for setting the
 partial checksum coverage (RFC 4340, sec. 9.2). The default is that checksums
@@ -50,12 +55,13 @@ be enabled at the receiver, too with suitable choice of CsCov.
 DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV sets the sender checksum coverage. Values in the
         range 0..15 are acceptable. The default setting is 0 (full coverage),
         values between 1..15 indicate partial coverage.
-DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV is for the receiver and has a different meaning: it
+DCCP_SOCKOPT_RECV_CSCOV is for the receiver and has a different meaning: it
         sets a threshold, where again values 0..15 are acceptable. The default
         of 0 means that all packets with a partial coverage will be discarded.
         Values in the range 1..15 indicate that packets with minimally such a
         coverage value are also acceptable. The higher the number, the more
-        restrictive this setting (see [RFC 4340, sec. 9.2.1]).
+        restrictive this setting (see [RFC 4340, sec. 9.2.1]). Partial coverage
+        settings are inherited to the child socket after accept().
 
 The following two options apply to CCID 3 exclusively and are getsockopt()-only.
 In either case, a TFRC info struct (defined in <linux/tfrc.h>) is returned.
@@ -112,9 +118,14 @@ tx_qlen = 5
         The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds
         to an unbounded transmit buffer.
 
+sync_ratelimit = 125 ms
+        The timeout between subsequent DCCP-Sync packets sent in response to
+        sequence-invalid packets on the same socket (RFC 4340, 7.5.4). The unit
+        of this parameter is milliseconds; a value of 0 disables rate-limiting.
+
 Notes
 =====
 
 DCCP does not travel through NAT successfully at present on many boxes. This is
-because the checksum covers the psuedo-header as per TCP and UDP. Linux NAT
+because the checksum covers the pseudo-header as per TCP and UDP. Linux NAT
 support for DCCP has been added.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt b/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 1aa1bb3f94ab..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/networking/dgrs.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-    The Digi International RightSwitch SE-X (dgrs) Device Driver
-
-This is a Linux driver for the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X
-EISA and PCI boards.  These are 4 (EISA) or 6 (PCI) port Ethernet
-switches and a NIC combined into a single board.  This driver can
-be compiled into the kernel statically or as a loadable module.
-
-There is also a companion management tool, called "xrightswitch".
-The management tool lets you watch the performance graphically,
-as well as set the SNMP agent IP and IPX addresses, IEEE Spanning
-Tree, and Aging time.  These can also be set from the command line
-when the driver is loaded.  The driver command line options are:
-
-        debug=NNN               Debug printing level
-        dma=0/1                 Disable/Enable DMA on PCI card
-        spantree=0/1            Disable/Enable IEEE spanning tree
-        hashexpire=NNN          Change address aging time (default 300 seconds)
-        ipaddr=A,B,C,D          Set SNMP agent IP address i.e. 199,86,8,221
-        iptrap=A,B,C,D          Set SNMP agent IP trap address i.e. 199,86,8,221
-        ipxnet=NNN              Set SNMP agent IPX network number
-        nicmode=0/1             Disable/Enable multiple NIC mode
-
-There is also a tool for setting up input and output packet filters
-on each port, called "dgrsfilt".
-
-Both the management tool and the filtering tool are available
-separately from the following FTP site:
-
-        ftp://ftp.dgii.com/drivers/rightswitch/linux/
-
-When nicmode=1, the board and driver operate as 4 or 6 individual
-NIC ports (eth0...eth5) instead of as a switch.  All switching
-functions are disabled.  In the future, the board firmware may include
-a routing cache when in this mode.
-
-Copyright 1995-1996 Digi International Inc.
-
-This software may be used and distributed according to the terms
-of the GNU General Public License, incorporated herein by reference.
-
-For information on purchasing a RightSwitch SE-4 or SE-6
-board, please contact Digi's sales department at 1-612-912-3444
-or 1-800-DIGIBRD.  Outside the U.S., please check our Web page at:
-
-        http://www.dgii.com
-
-for sales offices worldwide.  Tech support is also available through
-the channels listed on the Web site, although as long as I am
-employed on networking products at Digi I will be happy to provide
-any bug fixes that may be needed.
-
--Rick Richardson, rick@dgii.com
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
index 32c2e9da5f3a..6ae2feff3087 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
@@ -180,13 +180,20 @@ tcp_fin_timeout - INTEGER
         to live longer. Cf. tcp_max_orphans.
 
 tcp_frto - INTEGER
-        Enables F-RTO, an enhanced recovery algorithm for TCP retransmission
+        Enables Forward RTO-Recovery (F-RTO) defined in RFC4138.
+        F-RTO is an enhanced recovery algorithm for TCP retransmission
         timeouts.  It is particularly beneficial in wireless environments
         where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference
-        rather than intermediate router congestion. If set to 1, basic
-        version is enabled. 2 enables SACK enhanced F-RTO, which is
-        EXPERIMENTAL. The basic version can be used also when SACK is
-        enabled for a flow through tcp_sack sysctl.
+        rather than intermediate router congestion.  FRTO is sender-side
+        only modification.  Therefore it does not require any support from
+        the peer, but in a typical case, however, where wireless link is
+        the local access link and most of the data flows downlink, the
+        faraway servers should have FRTO enabled to take advantage of it.
+        If set to 1, basic version is enabled.  2 enables SACK enhanced
+        F-RTO if flow uses SACK.  The basic version can be used also when
+        SACK is in use though scenario(s) with it exists where FRTO
+        interacts badly with the packet counting of the SACK enabled TCP
+        flow.
 
 tcp_frto_response - INTEGER
         When F-RTO has detected that a TCP retransmission timeout was
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt
index 53ef7a06f49c..84906ef3ed6e 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt
@@ -13,15 +13,35 @@ The radiotap format is discussed in
 ./Documentation/networking/radiotap-headers.txt.
 
 Despite 13 radiotap argument types are currently defined, most only make sense
-to appear on received packets.  Currently three kinds of argument are used by
-the injection code, although it knows to skip any other arguments that are
-present (facilitating replay of captured radiotap headers directly):
+to appear on received packets.  The following information is parsed from the
+radiotap headers and used to control injection:
 
- - IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_RATE - u8 arg in 500kbps units (0x02 --> 1Mbps)
+ * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_RATE
 
- - IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_ANTENNA - u8 arg, 0x00 = ant1, 0x01 = ant2
+   rate in 500kbps units, automatic if invalid or not present
 
- - IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_TX_POWER - u8 arg, dBm
+
+ * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_ANTENNA
+
+   antenna to use, automatic if not present
+
+
+ * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_TX_POWER
+
+   transmit power in dBm, automatic if not present
+
+
+ * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_FLAGS
+
+   IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_FCS: FCS will be removed and recalculated
+   IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_WEP: frame will be encrypted if key available
+   IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_FRAG: frame will be fragmented if longer than the
+                              current fragmentation threshold. Note that
+                              this flag is only reliable when software
+                              fragmentation is enabled)
+
+The injection code can also skip all other currently defined radiotap fields
+facilitating replay of captured radiotap headers directly.
 
 Here is an example valid radiotap header defining these three parameters
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
index 00b60cce2224..ea5a42e8f79f 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
@@ -58,9 +58,13 @@ software, so it's a straight round-robin qdisc.  It uses the same syntax and
 classification priomap that sch_prio uses, so it should be intuitive to
 configure for people who've used sch_prio.
 
-The PRIO qdisc naturally plugs into a multiqueue device.  If PRIO has been
-built with NET_SCH_PRIO_MQ, then upon load, it will make sure the number of
-bands requested is equal to the number of queues on the hardware.  If they
+In order to utilitize the multiqueue features of the qdiscs, the network
+device layer needs to enable multiple queue support.  This can be done by
+selecting NETDEVICES_MULTIQUEUE under Drivers.
+
+The PRIO qdisc naturally plugs into a multiqueue device.  If
+NETDEVICES_MULTIQUEUE is selected, then on qdisc load, the number of
+bands requested is compared to the number of queues on the hardware.  If they
 are equal, it sets a one-to-one mapping up between the queues and bands.  If
 they're not equal, it will not load the qdisc.  This is the same behavior
 for RR.  Once the association is made, any skb that is classified will have
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
index 1caa6c734691..3c2f2b328638 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,10 @@ started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>, 2001.09.17
 2.6 port and netpoll api by Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>, Sep 9 2003
 
 Please send bug reports to Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>
+and Satyam Sharma <satyam.sharma@gmail.com>
+
+Introduction:
+=============
 
 This module logs kernel printk messages over UDP allowing debugging of
 problem where disk logging fails and serial consoles are impractical.
@@ -13,6 +17,9 @@ the specified interface as soon as possible. While this doesn't allow
 capture of early kernel panics, it does capture most of the boot
 process.
 
+Sender and receiver configuration:
+==================================
+
 It takes a string configuration parameter "netconsole" in the
 following format:
 
@@ -34,21 +41,113 @@ Examples:
 
  insmod netconsole netconsole=@/,@10.0.0.2/
 
+It also supports logging to multiple remote agents by specifying
+parameters for the multiple agents separated by semicolons and the
+complete string enclosed in "quotes", thusly:
+
+ modprobe netconsole netconsole="@/,@10.0.0.2/;@/eth1,6892@10.0.0.3/"
+
 Built-in netconsole starts immediately after the TCP stack is
 initialized and attempts to bring up the supplied dev at the supplied
 address.
 
 The remote host can run either 'netcat -u -l -p <port>' or syslogd.
 
+Dynamic reconfiguration:
+========================
+
+Dynamic reconfigurability is a useful addition to netconsole that enables
+remote logging targets to be dynamically added, removed, or have their
+parameters reconfigured at runtime from a configfs-based userspace interface.
+[ Note that the parameters of netconsole targets that were specified/created
+from the boot/module option are not exposed via this interface, and hence
+cannot be modified dynamically. ]
+
+To include this feature, select CONFIG_NETCONSOLE_DYNAMIC when building the
+netconsole module (or kernel, if netconsole is built-in).
+
+Some examples follow (where configfs is mounted at the /sys/kernel/config
+mountpoint).
+
+To add a remote logging target (target names can be arbitrary):
+
+ cd /sys/kernel/config/netconsole/
+ mkdir target1
+
+Note that newly created targets have default parameter values (as mentioned
+above) and are disabled by default -- they must first be enabled by writing
+"1" to the "enabled" attribute (usually after setting parameters accordingly)
+as described below.
+
+To remove a target:
+
+ rmdir /sys/kernel/config/netconsole/othertarget/
+
+The interface exposes these parameters of a netconsole target to userspace:
+
+        enabled         Is this target currently enabled?       (read-write)
+        dev_name        Local network interface name            (read-write)
+        local_port      Source UDP port to use                  (read-write)
+        remote_port     Remote agent's UDP port                 (read-write)
+        local_ip        Source IP address to use                (read-write)
+        remote_ip       Remote agent's IP address               (read-write)
+        local_mac       Local interface's MAC address           (read-only)
+        remote_mac      Remote agent's MAC address              (read-write)
+
+The "enabled" attribute is also used to control whether the parameters of
+a target can be updated or not -- you can modify the parameters of only
+disabled targets (i.e. if "enabled" is 0).
+
+To update a target's parameters:
+
+ cat enabled                            # check if enabled is 1
+ echo 0 > enabled                       # disable the target (if required)
+ echo eth2 > dev_name                   # set local interface
+ echo 10.0.0.4 > remote_ip              # update some parameter
+ echo cb:a9:87:65:43:21 > remote_mac    # update more parameters
+ echo 1 > enabled                       # enable target again
+
+You can also update the local interface dynamically. This is especially
+useful if you want to use interfaces that have newly come up (and may not
+have existed when netconsole was loaded / initialized).
+
+Miscellaneous notes:
+====================
+
 WARNING: the default target ethernet setting uses the broadcast
 ethernet address to send packets, which can cause increased load on
 other systems on the same ethernet segment.
 
+TIP: some LAN switches may be configured to suppress ethernet broadcasts
+so it is advised to explicitly specify the remote agents' MAC addresses
+from the config parameters passed to netconsole.
+
+TIP: to find out the MAC address of, say, 10.0.0.2, you may try using:
+
+ ping -c 1 10.0.0.2 ; /sbin/arp -n | grep 10.0.0.2
+
+TIP: in case the remote logging agent is on a separate LAN subnet than
+the sender, it is suggested to try specifying the MAC address of the
+default gateway (you may use /sbin/route -n to find it out) as the
+remote MAC address instead.
+
 NOTE: the network device (eth1 in the above case) can run any kind
 of other network traffic, netconsole is not intrusive. Netconsole
 might cause slight delays in other traffic if the volume of kernel
 messages is high, but should have no other impact.
 
+NOTE: if you find that the remote logging agent is not receiving or
+printing all messages from the sender, it is likely that you have set
+the "console_loglevel" parameter (on the sender) to only send high
+priority messages to the console. You can change this at runtime using:
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+or by specifying "debug" on the kernel command line at boot, to send
+all kernel messages to the console. A specific value for this parameter
+can also be set using the "loglevel" kernel boot option. See the
+dmesg(8) man page and Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt for details.
+
 Netconsole was designed to be as instantaneous as possible, to
 enable the logging of even the most critical kernel bugs. It works
 from IRQ contexts as well, and does not enable interrupts while
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
index 37869295fc70..d0f71fc7f782 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
@@ -73,7 +73,8 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit:
         has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock
         for this and return NETDEV_TX_LOCKED when the spin lock fails.
         The locking there should also properly protect against 
-        set_multicast_list.
+        set_multicast_list. Note that the use of NETIF_F_LLTX is deprecated.
+        Dont use it for new drivers.
 
         Context: Process with BHs disabled or BH (timer),
                  will be called with interrupts disabled by netconsole.
@@ -95,9 +96,13 @@ dev->set_multicast_list:
         Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
         Context: BHs disabled
 
-dev->poll:
-        Synchronization: __LINK_STATE_RX_SCHED bit in dev->state.  See
-                dev_close code and comments in net/core/dev.c for more info.
+struct napi_struct synchronization rules
+========================================
+napi->poll:
+        Synchronization: NAPI_STATE_SCHED bit in napi->state.  Device
+                driver's dev->close method will invoke napi_disable() on
+                all NAPI instances which will do a sleeping poll on the
+                NAPI_STATE_SCHED napi->state bit, waiting for all pending
+                NAPI activity to cease.
         Context: softirq
                  will be called with interrupts disabled by netconsole.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt b/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8590a954df1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/sk98lin.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,568 @@
+(C)Copyright 1999-2004 Marvell(R).
+All rights reserved
+===========================================================================
+
+sk98lin.txt created 13-Feb-2004
+
+Readme File for sk98lin v6.23
+Marvell Yukon/SysKonnect SK-98xx Gigabit Ethernet Adapter family driver for LINUX
+
+This file contains
+ 1  Overview
+ 2  Required Files
+ 3  Installation
+    3.1  Driver Installation
+    3.2  Inclusion of adapter at system start
+ 4  Driver Parameters
+    4.1  Per-Port Parameters
+    4.2  Adapter Parameters
+ 5  Large Frame Support
+ 6  VLAN and Link Aggregation Support (IEEE 802.1, 802.1q, 802.3ad)
+ 7  Troubleshooting
+
+===========================================================================
+
+
+1  Overview
+===========
+
+The sk98lin driver supports the Marvell Yukon and SysKonnect 
+SK-98xx/SK-95xx compliant Gigabit Ethernet Adapter on Linux. It has 
+been tested with Linux on Intel/x86 machines.
+***
+
+
+2  Required Files
+=================
+
+The linux kernel source.
+No additional files required.
+***
+
+
+3  Installation
+===============
+
+It is recommended to download the latest version of the driver from the 
+SysKonnect web site www.syskonnect.com. If you have downloaded the latest
+driver, the Linux kernel has to be patched before the driver can be 
+installed. For details on how to patch a Linux kernel, refer to the 
+patch.txt file.
+
+3.1  Driver Installation
+------------------------
+
+The following steps describe the actions that are required to install
+the driver and to start it manually. These steps should be carried
+out for the initial driver setup. Once confirmed to be ok, they can
+be included in the system start.
+
+NOTE 1: To perform the following tasks you need 'root' access.
+
+NOTE 2: In case of problems, please read the section "Troubleshooting" 
+        below.
+
+The driver can either be integrated into the kernel or it can be compiled 
+as a module. Select the appropriate option during the kernel 
+configuration.
+
+Compile/use the driver as a module
+----------------------------------
+To compile the driver, go to the directory /usr/src/linux and
+execute the command "make menuconfig" or "make xconfig" and proceed as 
+follows:
+
+To integrate the driver permanently into the kernel, proceed as follows:
+
+1. Select the menu "Network device support" and then "Ethernet(1000Mbit)"
+2. Mark "Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx family support" 
+   with (*) 
+3. Build a new kernel when the configuration of the above options is 
+   finished.
+4. Install the new kernel.
+5. Reboot your system.
+
+To use the driver as a module, proceed as follows:
+
+1. Enable 'loadable module support' in the kernel.
+2. For automatic driver start, enable the 'Kernel module loader'.
+3. Select the menu "Network device support" and then "Ethernet(1000Mbit)"
+4. Mark "Marvell Yukon Chipset / SysKonnect SK-98xx family support" 
+   with (M)
+5. Execute the command "make modules".
+6. Execute the command "make modules_install".
+   The appropriate modules will be installed.
+7. Reboot your system.
+
+
+Load the module manually
+------------------------
+To load the module manually, proceed as follows:
+
+1. Enter "modprobe sk98lin".
+2. If a Marvell Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx adapter is installed in 
+   your computer and you have a /proc file system, execute the command:
+   "ls /proc/net/sk98lin/" 
+   This should produce an output containing a line with the following 
+   format:
+   eth0   eth1  ...
+   which indicates that your adapter has been found and initialized.
+   
+   NOTE 1: If you have more than one Marvell Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx 
+           adapter installed, the adapters will be listed as 'eth0', 
+                   'eth1', 'eth2', etc.
+                   For each adapter, repeat steps 3 and 4 below.
+
+   NOTE 2: If you have other Ethernet adapters installed, your Marvell
+           Yukon or SysKonnect SK-98xx adapter will be mapped to the 
+                   next available number, e.g. 'eth1'. The mapping is executed 
+                   automatically.
+           The module installation message (displayed either in a system
+           log file or on the console) prints a line for each adapter 
+           found containing the corresponding 'ethX'.
+
+3. Select an IP address and assign it to the respective adapter by 
+   entering:
+   ifconfig eth0 <ip-address>
+   With this command, the adapter is connected to the Ethernet. 
+   
+   SK-98xx Gigabit Ethernet Server Adapters: The yellow LED on the adapter 
+   is now active, the link status LED of the primary port is active and 
+   the link status LED of the secondary port (on dual port adapters) is 
+   blinking (if the ports are connected to a switch or hub).
+   SK-98xx V2.0 Gigabit Ethernet Adapters: The link status LED is active.
+   In addition, you will receive a status message on the console stating
+   "ethX: network connection up using port Y" and showing the selected 
+   connection parameters (x stands for the ethernet device number 
+   (0,1,2, etc), y stands for the port name (A or B)).
+
+   NOTE: If you are in doubt about IP addresses, ask your network
+         administrator for assistance.
+  
+4. Your adapter should now be fully operational.
+   Use 'ping <otherstation>' to verify the connection to other computers 
+   on your network.
+5. To check the adapter configuration view /proc/net/sk98lin/[devicename].
+   For example by executing:    
+   "cat /proc/net/sk98lin/eth0" 
+
+Unload the module
+-----------------
+To stop and unload the driver modules, proceed as follows:
+
+1. Execute the command "ifconfig eth0 down".
+2. Execute the command "rmmod sk98lin".
+
+3.2  Inclusion of adapter at system start
+-----------------------------------------
+
+Since a large number of different Linux distributions are 
+available, we are unable to describe a general installation procedure
+for the driver module.
+Because the driver is now integrated in the kernel, installation should
+be easy, using the standard mechanism of your distribution.
+Refer to the distribution's manual for installation of ethernet adapters.
+
+***
+
+4  Driver Parameters
+====================
+
+Parameters can be set at the command line after the module has been 
+loaded with the command 'modprobe'.
+In some distributions, the configuration tools are able to pass parameters
+to the driver module.
+
+If you use the kernel module loader, you can set driver parameters
+in the file /etc/modprobe.conf (or /etc/modules.conf in 2.4 or earlier).
+To set the driver parameters in this file, proceed as follows:
+
+1. Insert a line of the form :
+   options sk98lin ...
+   For "...", the same syntax is required as described for the command
+   line parameters of modprobe below.
+2. To activate the new parameters, either reboot your computer
+   or 
+   unload and reload the driver.
+   The syntax of the driver parameters is:
+
+        modprobe sk98lin parameter=value1[,value2[,value3...]]
+
+   where value1 refers to the first adapter, value2 to the second etc.
+
+NOTE: All parameters are case sensitive. Write them exactly as shown 
+      below.
+
+Example:
+Suppose you have two adapters. You want to set auto-negotiation
+on the first adapter to ON and on the second adapter to OFF.
+You also want to set DuplexCapabilities on the first adapter
+to FULL, and on the second adapter to HALF.
+Then, you must enter:
+
+        modprobe sk98lin AutoNeg_A=On,Off DupCap_A=Full,Half
+
+NOTE: The number of adapters that can be configured this way is
+      limited in the driver (file skge.c, constant SK_MAX_CARD_PARAM).
+      The current limit is 16. If you happen to install
+      more adapters, adjust this and recompile.
+
+
+4.1  Per-Port Parameters
+------------------------
+
+These settings are available for each port on the adapter.
+In the following description, '?' stands for the port for
+which you set the parameter (A or B).
+
+Speed
+-----
+Parameter:    Speed_?
+Values:       10, 100, 1000, Auto
+Default:      Auto
+
+This parameter is used to set the speed capabilities. It is only valid 
+for the SK-98xx V2.0 copper adapters.
+Usually, the speed is negotiated between the two ports during link 
+establishment. If this fails, a port can be forced to a specific setting
+with this parameter.
+
+Auto-Negotiation
+----------------
+Parameter:    AutoNeg_?
+Values:       On, Off, Sense
+Default:      On
+  
+The "Sense"-mode automatically detects whether the link partner supports
+auto-negotiation or not.
+
+Duplex Capabilities
+-------------------
+Parameter:    DupCap_?
+Values:       Half, Full, Both
+Default:      Both
+
+This parameters is only relevant if auto-negotiation for this port is 
+not set to "Sense". If auto-negotiation is set to "On", all three values
+are possible. If it is set to "Off", only "Full" and "Half" are allowed.
+This parameter is useful if your link partner does not support all
+possible combinations.
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Parameter:    FlowCtrl_?
+Values:       Sym, SymOrRem, LocSend, None
+Default:      SymOrRem
+
+This parameter can be used to set the flow control capabilities the 
+port reports during auto-negotiation. It can be set for each port 
+individually.
+Possible modes:
+   -- Sym      = Symmetric: both link partners are allowed to send 
+                  PAUSE frames
+   -- SymOrRem = SymmetricOrRemote: both or only remote partner 
+                  are allowed to send PAUSE frames
+   -- LocSend  = LocalSend: only local link partner is allowed 
+                  to send PAUSE frames
+   -- None     = no link partner is allowed to send PAUSE frames
+  
+NOTE: This parameter is ignored if auto-negotiation is set to "Off".
+
+Role in Master-Slave-Negotiation (1000Base-T only)
+--------------------------------------------------
+Parameter:    Role_?
+Values:       Auto, Master, Slave
+Default:      Auto
+
+This parameter is only valid for the SK-9821 and SK-9822 adapters.
+For two 1000Base-T ports to communicate, one must take the role of the
+master (providing timing information), while the other must be the 
+slave. Usually, this is negotiated between the two ports during link 
+establishment. If this fails, a port can be forced to a specific setting
+with this parameter.
+
+
+4.2  Adapter Parameters
+-----------------------
+
+Connection Type (SK-98xx V2.0 copper adapters only)
+---------------
+Parameter:    ConType
+Values:       Auto, 100FD, 100HD, 10FD, 10HD
+Default:      Auto
+
+The parameter 'ConType' is a combination of all five per-port parameters
+within one single parameter. This simplifies the configuration of both ports
+of an adapter card! The different values of this variable reflect the most 
+meaningful combinations of port parameters.
+
+The following table shows the values of 'ConType' and the corresponding
+combinations of the per-port parameters:
+
+    ConType   |  DupCap   AutoNeg   FlowCtrl   Role             Speed
+    ----------+------------------------------------------------------
+    Auto      |  Both     On        SymOrRem   Auto             Auto
+    100FD     |  Full     Off       None       Auto (ignored)   100
+    100HD     |  Half     Off       None       Auto (ignored)   100
+    10FD      |  Full     Off       None       Auto (ignored)   10
+    10HD      |  Half     Off       None       Auto (ignored)   10
+
+Stating any other port parameter together with this 'ConType' variable
+will result in a merged configuration of those settings. This due to 
+the fact, that the per-port parameters (e.g. Speed_? ) have a higher
+priority than the combined variable 'ConType'.
+
+NOTE: This parameter is always used on both ports of the adapter card.
+
+Interrupt Moderation
+--------------------
+Parameter:    Moderation
+Values:       None, Static, Dynamic
+Default:      None
+
+Interrupt moderation is employed to limit the maximum number of interrupts
+the driver has to serve. That is, one or more interrupts (which indicate any
+transmit or receive packet to be processed) are queued until the driver 
+processes them. When queued interrupts are to be served, is determined by the
+'IntsPerSec' parameter, which is explained later below.
+
+Possible modes:
+
+   -- None - No interrupt moderation is applied on the adapter card. 
+      Therefore, each transmit or receive interrupt is served immediately
+      as soon as it appears on the interrupt line of the adapter card.
+
+   -- Static - Interrupt moderation is applied on the adapter card. 
+      All transmit and receive interrupts are queued until a complete
+      moderation interval ends. If such a moderation interval ends, all
+      queued interrupts are processed in one big bunch without any delay.
+      The term 'static' reflects the fact, that interrupt moderation is
+      always enabled, regardless how much network load is currently 
+      passing via a particular interface. In addition, the duration of
+      the moderation interval has a fixed length that never changes while
+      the driver is operational.
+
+   -- Dynamic - Interrupt moderation might be applied on the adapter card,
+      depending on the load of the system. If the driver detects that the
+      system load is too high, the driver tries to shield the system against 
+      too much network load by enabling interrupt moderation. If - at a later
+      time - the CPU utilization decreases again (or if the network load is 
+      negligible) the interrupt moderation will automatically be disabled.
+
+Interrupt moderation should be used when the driver has to handle one or more
+interfaces with a high network load, which - as a consequence - leads also to a
+high CPU utilization. When moderation is applied in such high network load 
+situations, CPU load might be reduced by 20-30%.
+
+NOTE: The drawback of using interrupt moderation is an increase of the round-
+trip-time (RTT), due to the queueing and serving of interrupts at dedicated
+moderation times.
+
+Interrupts per second
+---------------------
+Parameter:    IntsPerSec
+Values:       30...40000 (interrupts per second)
+Default:      2000
+
+This parameter is only used if either static or dynamic interrupt moderation
+is used on a network adapter card. Using this parameter if no moderation is
+applied will lead to no action performed.
+
+This parameter determines the length of any interrupt moderation interval. 
+Assuming that static interrupt moderation is to be used, an 'IntsPerSec' 
+parameter value of 2000 will lead to an interrupt moderation interval of
+500 microseconds. 
+
+NOTE: The duration of the moderation interval is to be chosen with care.
+At first glance, selecting a very long duration (e.g. only 100 interrupts per 
+second) seems to be meaningful, but the increase of packet-processing delay 
+is tremendous. On the other hand, selecting a very short moderation time might
+compensate the use of any moderation being applied.
+
+
+Preferred Port
+--------------
+Parameter:    PrefPort
+Values:       A, B
+Default:      A
+
+This is used to force the preferred port to A or B (on dual-port network 
+adapters). The preferred port is the one that is used if both are detected
+as fully functional.
+
+RLMT Mode (Redundant Link Management Technology)
+------------------------------------------------
+Parameter:    RlmtMode
+Values:       CheckLinkState,CheckLocalPort, CheckSeg, DualNet
+Default:      CheckLinkState
+
+RLMT monitors the status of the port. If the link of the active port 
+fails, RLMT switches immediately to the standby link. The virtual link is 
+maintained as long as at least one 'physical' link is up. 
+
+Possible modes:
+
+   -- CheckLinkState - Check link state only: RLMT uses the link state
+      reported by the adapter hardware for each individual port to 
+      determine whether a port can be used for all network traffic or 
+      not.
+
+   -- CheckLocalPort - In this mode, RLMT monitors the network path 
+      between the two ports of an adapter by regularly exchanging packets
+      between them. This mode requires a network configuration in which 
+      the two ports are able to "see" each other (i.e. there must not be 
+      any router between the ports).
+
+   -- CheckSeg - Check local port and segmentation: This mode supports the
+      same functions as the CheckLocalPort mode and additionally checks 
+      network segmentation between the ports. Therefore, this mode is only
+      to be used if Gigabit Ethernet switches are installed on the network
+      that have been configured to use the Spanning Tree protocol. 
+
+   -- DualNet - In this mode, ports A and B are used as separate devices. 
+      If you have a dual port adapter, port A will be configured as eth0 
+      and port B as eth1. Both ports can be used independently with 
+      distinct IP addresses. The preferred port setting is not used. 
+      RLMT is turned off.
+   
+NOTE: RLMT modes CLP and CLPSS are designed to operate in configurations 
+      where a network path between the ports on one adapter exists. 
+      Moreover, they are not designed to work where adapters are connected
+      back-to-back.
+***
+
+
+5  Large Frame Support
+======================
+
+The driver supports large frames (also called jumbo frames). Using large 
+frames can result in an improved throughput if transferring large amounts 
+of data.
+To enable large frames, set the MTU (maximum transfer unit) of the 
+interface to the desired value (up to 9000), execute the following 
+command:
+      ifconfig eth0 mtu 9000
+This will only work if you have two adapters connected back-to-back
+or if you use a switch that supports large frames. When using a switch, 
+it should be configured to allow large frames and auto-negotiation should  
+be set to OFF. The setting must be configured on all adapters that can be 
+reached by the large frames. If one adapter is not set to receive large 
+frames, it will simply drop them.
+
+You can switch back to the standard ethernet frame size by executing the 
+following command:
+      ifconfig eth0 mtu 1500
+
+To permanently configure this setting, add a script with the 'ifconfig' 
+line to the system startup sequence (named something like "S99sk98lin" 
+in /etc/rc.d/rc2.d).
+***
+
+
+6  VLAN and Link Aggregation Support (IEEE 802.1, 802.1q, 802.3ad)
+==================================================================
+
+The Marvell Yukon/SysKonnect Linux drivers are able to support VLAN and 
+Link Aggregation according to IEEE standards 802.1, 802.1q, and 802.3ad. 
+These features are only available after installation of open source 
+modules available on the Internet:
+For VLAN go to: http://www.candelatech.com/~greear/vlan.html
+For Link Aggregation go to: http://www.st.rim.or.jp/~yumo
+
+NOTE: SysKonnect GmbH does not offer any support for these open source 
+      modules and does not take the responsibility for any kind of 
+      failures or problems arising in connection with these modules.
+
+NOTE: Configuring Link Aggregation on a SysKonnect dual link adapter may 
+      cause problems when unloading the driver.
+
+
+7  Troubleshooting
+==================
+
+If any problems occur during the installation process, check the 
+following list:
+
+
+Problem:  The SK-98xx adapter cannot be found by the driver.
+Solution: In /proc/pci search for the following entry:
+             'Ethernet controller: SysKonnect SK-98xx ...'
+          If this entry exists, the SK-98xx or SK-98xx V2.0 adapter has 
+          been found by the system and should be operational.
+          If this entry does not exist or if the file '/proc/pci' is not 
+          found, there may be a hardware problem or the PCI support may 
+          not be enabled in your kernel.
+          The adapter can be checked using the diagnostics program which 
+          is available on the SysKonnect web site:
+          www.syskonnect.com
+          
+          Some COMPAQ machines have problems dealing with PCI under Linux.
+          This problem is described in the 'PCI howto' document
+          (included in some distributions or available from the
+          web, e.g. at 'www.linux.org'). 
+
+
+Problem:  Programs such as 'ifconfig' or 'route' cannot be found or the 
+          error message 'Operation not permitted' is displayed.
+Reason:   You are not logged in as user 'root'.
+Solution: Logout and login as 'root' or change to 'root' via 'su'.
+
+
+Problem:  Upon use of the command 'ping <address>' the message
+          "ping: sendto: Network is unreachable" is displayed.
+Reason:   Your route is not set correctly.
+Solution: If you are using RedHat, you probably forgot to set up the 
+          route in the 'network configuration'.
+          Check the existing routes with the 'route' command and check 
+          if an entry for 'eth0' exists, and if so, if it is set correctly.
+
+
+Problem:  The driver can be started, the adapter is connected to the 
+          network, but you cannot receive or transmit any packets; 
+          e.g. 'ping' does not work.
+Reason:   There is an incorrect route in your routing table.
+Solution: Check the routing table with the command 'route' and read the 
+          manual help pages dealing with routes (enter 'man route').
+
+NOTE: Although the 2.2.x kernel versions generate the routing entry 
+      automatically, problems of this kind may occur here as well. We've 
+      come across a situation in which the driver started correctly at 
+      system start, but after the driver has been removed and reloaded,
+      the route of the adapter's network pointed to the 'dummy0'device 
+      and had to be corrected manually.
+
+
+Problem:  Your computer should act as a router between multiple 
+          IP subnetworks (using multiple adapters), but computers in 
+          other subnetworks cannot be reached.
+Reason:   Either the router's kernel is not configured for IP forwarding 
+          or the routing table and gateway configuration of at least one 
+          computer is not working.
+
+Problem:  Upon driver start, the following error message is displayed:
+          "eth0: -- ERROR --
+          Class: internal Software error
+          Nr:    0xcc
+          Msg:   SkGeInitPort() cannot init running ports"
+Reason:   You are using a driver compiled for single processor machines 
+          on a multiprocessor machine with SMP (Symmetric MultiProcessor) 
+          kernel.
+Solution: Configure your kernel appropriately and recompile the kernel or
+          the modules.
+
+
+
+If your problem is not listed here, please contact SysKonnect's technical
+support for help (linux@syskonnect.de).
+When contacting our technical support, please ensure that the following 
+information is available:
+- System Manufacturer and HW Informations (CPU, Memory... )
+- PCI-Boards in your system
+- Distribution
+- Kernel version
+- Driver version
+***
+
+
+
+***End of Readme File***
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
index 76733a3962f0..a96e85397eb7 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Table of Contents
       g) Freescale SOC SEC Security Engines
       h) Board Control and Status (BCSR)
       i) Freescale QUICC Engine module (QE)
-      j) Flash chip nodes
+      j) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash
       k) Global Utilities Block
 
   VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
@@ -1510,7 +1510,10 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
 
    i) Freescale QUICC Engine module (QE)
    This represents qe module that is installed on PowerQUICC II Pro.
-   Hopefully it will merge backward compatibility with CPM/CPM2.
+
+   NOTE:  This is an interim binding; it should be updated to fit
+   in with the CPM binding later in this document.
+
    Basically, it is a bus of devices, that could act more or less
    as a complete entity (UCC, USB etc ). All of them should be siblings on
    the "root" qe node, using the common properties from there.
@@ -1548,7 +1551,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
    Required properties:
    - device_type : should be "spi".
    - compatible : should be "fsl_spi".
-   - mode : the SPI operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "qe".
+   - mode : the SPI operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "cpu-qe".
    - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
    - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
      field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
@@ -1757,45 +1760,69 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
                 };
         };
 
-    j) Flash chip nodes
+   j) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash
 
     Flash chips (Memory Technology Devices) are often used for solid state
     file systems on embedded devices.
 
-    Required properties:
-
-     - device_type : has to be "rom"
-     - compatible : Should specify what this flash device is compatible with.
-       Currently, this is most likely to be "direct-mapped" (which
-       corresponds to the MTD physmap mapping driver).
-     - reg : Offset and length of the register set (or memory mapping) for
-       the device.
-     - bank-width : Width of the flash data bus in bytes. Required
-       for the NOR flashes (compatible == "direct-mapped" and others) ONLY.
-
-    Recommended properties :
-
-     - partitions : Several pairs of 32-bit values where the first value is
-       partition's offset from the start of the device and the second one is
-       partition size in bytes with LSB used to signify a read only
-       partition (so, the partition size should always be an even number).
-     - partition-names : The list of concatenated zero terminated strings
-       representing the partition names.
-     - probe-type : The type of probe which should be done for the chip
-       (JEDEC vs CFI actually). Valid ONLY for NOR flashes.
+     - compatible : should contain the specific model of flash chip(s)
+       used, if known, followed by either "cfi-flash" or "jedec-flash"
+     - reg : Address range of the flash chip
+     - bank-width : Width (in bytes) of the flash bank.  Equal to the
+       device width times the number of interleaved chips.
+     - device-width : (optional) Width of a single flash chip.  If
+       omitted, assumed to be equal to 'bank-width'.
+     - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the flash has
+       sub-nodes representing partitions (see below).  In this case
+       both #address-cells and #size-cells must be equal to 1.
+
+    For JEDEC compatible devices, the following additional properties
+    are defined:
+
+     - vendor-id : Contains the flash chip's vendor id (1 byte).
+     - device-id : Contains the flash chip's device id (1 byte).
+
+    In addition to the information on the flash bank itself, the
+    device tree may optionally contain additional information
+    describing partitions of the flash address space.  This can be
+    used on platforms which have strong conventions about which
+    portions of the flash are used for what purposes, but which don't
+    use an on-flash partition table such as RedBoot.
+
+    Each partition is represented as a sub-node of the flash device.
+    Each node's name represents the name of the corresponding
+    partition of the flash device.
+
+    Flash partitions
+     - reg : The partition's offset and size within the flash bank.
+     - label : (optional) The label / name for this flash partition.
+       If omitted, the label is taken from the node name (excluding
+       the unit address).
+     - read-only : (optional) This parameter, if present, is a hint to
+       Linux that this flash partition should only be mounted
+       read-only.  This is usually used for flash partitions
+       containing early-boot firmware images or data which should not
+       be clobbered.
 
-   Example:
+    Example:
 
-        flash@ff000000 {
-                device_type = "rom";
-                compatible = "direct-mapped";
-                probe-type = "CFI";
-                reg = <ff000000 01000000>;
-                bank-width = <4>;
-                partitions = <00000000 00f80000
-                              00f80000 00080001>;
-                partition-names = "fs\0firmware";
-        };
+        flash@ff000000 {
+                compatible = "amd,am29lv128ml", "cfi-flash";
+                reg = <ff000000 01000000>;
+                bank-width = <4>;
+                device-width = <1>;
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                fs@0 {
+                        label = "fs";
+                        reg = <0 f80000>;
+                };
+                firmware@f80000 {
+                        label ="firmware";
+                        reg = <f80000 80000>;
+                        read-only;
+                };
+        };
 
    k) Global Utilities Block
 
@@ -1824,6 +1851,397 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
                 fsl,has-rstcr;
         };
 
+   l) Freescale Communications Processor Module
+
+   NOTE: This is an interim binding, and will likely change slightly,
+   as more devices are supported.  The QE bindings especially are
+   incomplete.
+
+   i) Root CPM node
+
+   Properties:
+   - compatible : "fsl,cpm1", "fsl,cpm2", or "fsl,qe".
+   - reg : A 48-byte region beginning with CPCR.
+
+   Example:
+        cpm@119c0 {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272-cpm", "fsl,cpm2";
+                reg = <119c0 30>;
+        }
+
+   ii) Properties common to mulitple CPM/QE devices
+
+   - fsl,cpm-command : This value is ORed with the opcode and command flag
+                       to specify the device on which a CPM command operates.
+
+   - fsl,cpm-brg : Indicates which baud rate generator the device
+                   is associated with.  If absent, an unused BRG
+                   should be dynamically allocated.  If zero, the
+                   device uses an external clock rather than a BRG.
+
+   - reg : Unless otherwise specified, the first resource represents the
+           scc/fcc/ucc registers, and the second represents the device's
+           parameter RAM region (if it has one).
+
+   iii) Serial
+
+   Currently defined compatibles:
+   - fsl,cpm1-smc-uart
+   - fsl,cpm2-smc-uart
+   - fsl,cpm1-scc-uart
+   - fsl,cpm2-scc-uart
+   - fsl,qe-uart
+
+   Example:
+
+        serial@11a00 {
+                device_type = "serial";
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272-scc-uart",
+                             "fsl,cpm2-scc-uart";
+                reg = <11a00 20 8000 100>;
+                interrupts = <28 8>;
+                interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+                fsl,cpm-brg = <1>;
+                fsl,cpm-command = <00800000>;
+        };
+
+   iii) Network
+
+   Currently defined compatibles:
+   - fsl,cpm1-scc-enet
+   - fsl,cpm2-scc-enet
+   - fsl,cpm1-fec-enet
+   - fsl,cpm2-fcc-enet (third resource is GFEMR)
+   - fsl,qe-enet
+
+   Example:
+
+        ethernet@11300 {
+                device_type = "network";
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272-fcc-enet",
+                             "fsl,cpm2-fcc-enet";
+                reg = <11300 20 8400 100 11390 1>;
+                local-mac-address = [ 00 00 00 00 00 00 ];
+                interrupts = <20 8>;
+                interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+                phy-handle = <&PHY0>;
+                linux,network-index = <0>;
+                fsl,cpm-command = <12000300>;
+        };
+
+   iv) MDIO
+
+   Currently defined compatibles:
+   fsl,pq1-fec-mdio (reg is same as first resource of FEC device)
+   fsl,cpm2-mdio-bitbang (reg is port C registers)
+
+   Properties for fsl,cpm2-mdio-bitbang:
+   fsl,mdio-pin : pin of port C controlling mdio data
+   fsl,mdc-pin : pin of port C controlling mdio clock
+
+   Example:
+
+        mdio@10d40 {
+                device_type = "mdio";
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272ads-mdio-bitbang",
+                             "fsl,mpc8272-mdio-bitbang",
+                             "fsl,cpm2-mdio-bitbang";
+                reg = <10d40 14>;
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <0>;
+                fsl,mdio-pin = <12>;
+                fsl,mdc-pin = <13>;
+        };
+
+   v) Baud Rate Generators
+
+   Currently defined compatibles:
+   fsl,cpm-brg
+   fsl,cpm1-brg
+   fsl,cpm2-brg
+
+   Properties:
+   - reg : There may be an arbitrary number of reg resources; BRG
+     numbers are assigned to these in order.
+   - clock-frequency : Specifies the base frequency driving
+     the BRG.
+
+   Example:
+
+        brg@119f0 {
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272-brg",
+                             "fsl,cpm2-brg",
+                             "fsl,cpm-brg";
+                reg = <119f0 10 115f0 10>;
+                clock-frequency = <d#25000000>;
+        };
+
+   vi) Interrupt Controllers
+
+   Currently defined compatibles:
+   - fsl,cpm1-pic
+     - only one interrupt cell
+   - fsl,pq1-pic
+   - fsl,cpm2-pic
+     - second interrupt cell is level/sense:
+       - 2 is falling edge
+       - 8 is active low
+
+   Example:
+
+        interrupt-controller@10c00 {
+                #interrupt-cells = <2>;
+                interrupt-controller;
+                reg = <10c00 80>;
+                compatible = "mpc8272-pic", "fsl,cpm2-pic";
+        };
+
+   vii) USB (Universal Serial Bus Controller)
+
+   Properties:
+   - compatible : "fsl,cpm1-usb", "fsl,cpm2-usb", "fsl,qe-usb"
+
+   Example:
+        usb@11bc0 {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <0>;
+                compatible = "fsl,cpm2-usb";
+                reg = <11b60 18 8b00 100>;
+                interrupts = <b 8>;
+                interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
+                fsl,cpm-command = <2e600000>;
+        };
+
+   viii) Multi-User RAM (MURAM)
+
+   The multi-user/dual-ported RAM is expressed as a bus under the CPM node.
+
+   Ranges must be set up subject to the following restrictions:
+
+   - Children's reg nodes must be offsets from the start of all muram, even
+     if the user-data area does not begin at zero.
+   - If multiple range entries are used, the difference between the parent
+     address and the child address must be the same in all, so that a single
+     mapping can cover them all while maintaining the ability to determine
+     CPM-side offsets with pointer subtraction.  It is recommended that
+     multiple range entries not be used.
+   - A child address of zero must be translatable, even if no reg resources
+     contain it.
+
+   A child "data" node must exist, compatible with "fsl,cpm-muram-data", to
+   indicate the portion of muram that is usable by the OS for arbitrary
+   purposes.  The data node may have an arbitrary number of reg resources,
+   all of which contribute to the allocatable muram pool.
+
+   Example, based on mpc8272:
+
+        muram@0 {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                ranges = <0 0 10000>;
+
+                data@0 {
+                        compatible = "fsl,cpm-muram-data";
+                        reg = <0 2000 9800 800>;
+                };
+        };
+
+   m) Chipselect/Local Bus
+
+   Properties:
+   - name : Should be localbus
+   - #address-cells : Should be either two or three.  The first cell is the
+                      chipselect number, and the remaining cells are the
+                      offset into the chipselect.
+   - #size-cells : Either one or two, depending on how large each chipselect
+                   can be.
+   - ranges : Each range corresponds to a single chipselect, and cover
+              the entire access window as configured.
+
+   Example:
+        localbus@f0010100 {
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8272ads-localbus",
+                             "fsl,mpc8272-localbus",
+                             "fsl,pq2-localbus";
+                #address-cells = <2>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                reg = <f0010100 40>;
+
+                ranges = <0 0 fe000000 02000000
+                          1 0 f4500000 00008000>;
+
+                flash@0,0 {
+                        compatible = "jedec-flash";
+                        reg = <0 0 2000000>;
+                        bank-width = <4>;
+                        device-width = <1>;
+                };
+
+                board-control@1,0 {
+                        reg = <1 0 20>;
+                        compatible = "fsl,mpc8272ads-bcsr";
+                };
+        };
+
+
+    n) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes
+
+    The EMAC ethernet controller in IBM and AMCC 4xx chips, and also
+    the Axon bridge.  To operate this needs to interact with a ths
+    special McMAL DMA controller, and sometimes an RGMII or ZMII
+    interface.  In addition to the nodes and properties described
+    below, the node for the OPB bus on which the EMAC sits must have a
+    correct clock-frequency property.
+
+      i) The EMAC node itself
+
+    Required properties:
+    - device_type       : "network"
+
+    - compatible        : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is
+                          "ibm,emac-CHIP" where CHIP is the host ASIC (440gx,
+                          405gp, Axon) and second is either "ibm,emac" or
+                          "ibm,emac4".  For Axon, thus, we have: "ibm,emac-axon",
+                          "ibm,emac4"
+    - interrupts        : <interrupt mapping for EMAC IRQ and WOL IRQ>
+    - interrupt-parent  : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping
+    - reg               : <registers mapping>
+    - local-mac-address : 6 bytes, MAC address
+    - mal-device        : phandle of the associated McMAL node
+    - mal-tx-channel    : 1 cell, index of the tx channel on McMAL associated
+                          with this EMAC
+    - mal-rx-channel    : 1 cell, index of the rx channel on McMAL associated
+                          with this EMAC
+    - cell-index        : 1 cell, hardware index of the EMAC cell on a given
+                          ASIC (typically 0x0 and 0x1 for EMAC0 and EMAC1 on
+                          each Axon chip)
+    - max-frame-size    : 1 cell, maximum frame size supported in bytes
+    - rx-fifo-size      : 1 cell, Rx fifo size in bytes for 10 and 100 Mb/sec
+                          operations.
+                          For Axon, 2048
+    - tx-fifo-size      : 1 cell, Tx fifo size in bytes for 10 and 100 Mb/sec
+                          operations.
+                          For Axon, 2048.
+    - fifo-entry-size   : 1 cell, size of a fifo entry (used to calculate
+                          thresholds).
+                          For Axon, 0x00000010
+    - mal-burst-size    : 1 cell, MAL burst size (used to calculate thresholds)
+                          in bytes.
+                          For Axon, 0x00000100 (I think ...)
+    - phy-mode          : string, mode of operations of the PHY interface.
+                          Supported values are: "mii", "rmii", "smii", "rgmii",
+                          "tbi", "gmii", rtbi", "sgmii".
+                          For Axon on CAB, it is "rgmii"
+    - mdio-device       : 1 cell, required iff using shared MDIO registers
+                          (440EP).  phandle of the EMAC to use to drive the
+                          MDIO lines for the PHY used by this EMAC.
+    - zmii-device       : 1 cell, required iff connected to a ZMII.  phandle of
+                          the ZMII device node
+    - zmii-channel      : 1 cell, required iff connected to a ZMII.  Which ZMII
+                          channel or 0xffffffff if ZMII is only used for MDIO.
+    - rgmii-device      : 1 cell, required iff connected to an RGMII. phandle
+                          of the RGMII device node.
+                          For Axon: phandle of plb5/plb4/opb/rgmii
+    - rgmii-channel     : 1 cell, required iff connected to an RGMII.  Which
+                          RGMII channel is used by this EMAC.
+                          Fox Axon: present, whatever value is appropriate for each
+                          EMAC, that is the content of the current (bogus) "phy-port"
+                          property.
+
+    Recommended properties:
+    - linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
+      network device.  This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
+      MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
+      than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
+
+    Optional properties:
+    - phy-address       : 1 cell, optional, MDIO address of the PHY. If absent,
+                          a search is performed.
+    - phy-map           : 1 cell, optional, bitmap of addresses to probe the PHY
+                          for, used if phy-address is absent. bit 0x00000001 is
+                          MDIO address 0.
+                          For Axon it can be absent, thouugh my current driver
+                          doesn't handle phy-address yet so for now, keep
+                          0x00ffffff in it.
+    - rx-fifo-size-gige : 1 cell, Rx fifo size in bytes for 1000 Mb/sec
+                          operations (if absent the value is the same as
+                          rx-fifo-size).  For Axon, either absent or 2048.
+    - tx-fifo-size-gige : 1 cell, Tx fifo size in bytes for 1000 Mb/sec
+                          operations (if absent the value is the same as
+                          tx-fifo-size). For Axon, either absent or 2048.
+    - tah-device        : 1 cell, optional. If connected to a TAH engine for
+                          offload, phandle of the TAH device node.
+    - tah-channel       : 1 cell, optional. If appropriate, channel used on the
+                          TAH engine.
+
+    Example:
+
+        EMAC0: ethernet@40000800 {
+                linux,network-index = <0>;
+                device_type = "network";
+                compatible = "ibm,emac-440gp", "ibm,emac";
+                interrupt-parent = <&UIC1>;
+                interrupts = <1c 4 1d 4>;
+                reg = <40000800 70>;
+                local-mac-address = [00 04 AC E3 1B 1E];
+                mal-device = <&MAL0>;
+                mal-tx-channel = <0 1>;
+                mal-rx-channel = <0>;
+                cell-index = <0>;
+                max-frame-size = <5dc>;
+                rx-fifo-size = <1000>;
+                tx-fifo-size = <800>;
+                phy-mode = "rmii";
+                phy-map = <00000001>;
+                zmii-device = <&ZMII0>;
+                zmii-channel = <0>;
+        };
+
+      ii) McMAL node
+
+    Required properties:
+    - device_type        : "dma-controller"
+    - compatible         : compatible list, containing 2 entries, first is
+                           "ibm,mcmal-CHIP" where CHIP is the host ASIC (like
+                           emac) and the second is either "ibm,mcmal" or
+                           "ibm,mcmal2".
+                           For Axon, "ibm,mcmal-axon","ibm,mcmal2"
+    - interrupts         : <interrupt mapping for the MAL interrupts sources:
+                           5 sources: tx_eob, rx_eob, serr, txde, rxde>.
+                           For Axon: This is _different_ from the current
+                           firmware.  We use the "delayed" interrupts for txeob
+                           and rxeob. Thus we end up with mapping those 5 MPIC
+                           interrupts, all level positive sensitive: 10, 11, 32,
+                           33, 34 (in decimal)
+    - dcr-reg            : < DCR registers range >
+    - dcr-parent         : if needed for dcr-reg
+    - num-tx-chans       : 1 cell, number of Tx channels
+    - num-rx-chans       : 1 cell, number of Rx channels
+
+      iii) ZMII node
+
+    Required properties:
+    - compatible         : compatible list, containing 2 entries, first is
+                           "ibm,zmii-CHIP" where CHIP is the host ASIC (like
+                           EMAC) and the second is "ibm,zmii".
+                           For Axon, there is no ZMII node.
+    - reg                : <registers mapping>
+
+      iv) RGMII node
+
+    Required properties:
+    - compatible         : compatible list, containing 2 entries, first is
+                           "ibm,rgmii-CHIP" where CHIP is the host ASIC (like
+                           EMAC) and the second is "ibm,rgmii".
+                           For Axon, "ibm,rgmii-axon","ibm,rgmii"
+    - reg                : <registers mapping>
+    - revision           : as provided by the RGMII new version register if
+                           available.
+                           For Axon: 0x0000012a
+
    More devices will be defined as this spec matures.
 
 VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a83ff23cd68c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+rfkill - RF switch subsystem support
+====================================
+
+1 Implementation details
+2 Driver support
+3 Userspace support
+
+===============================================================================
+1: Implementation details
+
+The rfkill switch subsystem offers support for keys often found on laptops
+to enable wireless devices like WiFi and Bluetooth.
+
+This is done by providing the user 3 possibilities:
+ 1 - The rfkill system handles all events; userspace is not aware of events.
+ 2 - The rfkill system handles all events; userspace is informed about the events.
+ 3 - The rfkill system does not handle events; userspace handles all events.
+
+The buttons to enable and disable the wireless radios are important in
+situations where the user is for example using his laptop on a location where
+wireless radios _must_ be disabled (e.g. airplanes).
+Because of this requirement, userspace support for the keys should not be
+made mandatory. Because userspace might want to perform some additional smarter
+tasks when the key is pressed, rfkill still provides userspace the possibility
+to take over the task to handle the key events.
+
+The system inside the kernel has been split into 2 separate sections:
+        1 - RFKILL
+        2 - RFKILL_INPUT
+
+The first option enables rfkill support and will make sure userspace will
+be notified of any events through the input device. It also creates several
+sysfs entries which can be used by userspace. See section "Userspace support".
+
+The second option provides an rfkill input handler. This handler will
+listen to all rfkill key events and will toggle the radio accordingly.
+With this option enabled userspace could either do nothing or simply
+perform monitoring tasks.
+
+====================================
+2: Driver support
+
+To build a driver with rfkill subsystem support, the driver should
+depend on the Kconfig symbol RFKILL; it should _not_ depend on
+RKFILL_INPUT.
+
+Unless key events trigger an interrupt to which the driver listens, polling
+will be required to determine the key state changes. For this the input
+layer providers the input-polldev handler.
+
+A driver should implement a few steps to correctly make use of the
+rfkill subsystem. First for non-polling drivers:
+
+        - rfkill_allocate()
+        - input_allocate_device()
+        - rfkill_register()
+        - input_register_device()
+
+For polling drivers:
+
+        - rfkill_allocate()
+        - input_allocate_polled_device()
+        - rfkill_register()
+        - input_register_polled_device()
+
+When a key event has been detected, the correct event should be
+sent over the input device which has been registered by the driver.
+
+====================================
+3: Userspace support
+
+For each key an input device will be created which will send out the correct
+key event when the rfkill key has been pressed.
+
+The following sysfs entries will be created:
+
+        name: Name assigned by driver to this key (interface or driver name).
+        type: Name of the key type ("wlan", "bluetooth", etc).
+        state: Current state of the key. 1: On, 0: Off.
+        claim: 1: Userspace handles events, 0: Kernel handles events
+
+Both the "state" and "claim" entries are also writable. For the "state" entry
+this means that when 1 or 0 is written all radios, not yet in the requested
+state, will be will be toggled accordingly.
+For the "claim" entry writing 1 to it means that the kernel no longer handles
+key events even though RFKILL_INPUT input was enabled. When "claim" has been
+set to 0, userspace should make sure that it listens for the input events or
+check the sysfs "state" entry regularly to correctly perform the required
+tasks when the rkfill key is pressed.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/00-INDEX b/Documentation/s390/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3a2b96302ecc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/s390/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+00-INDEX
+        - this file.
+3270.ChangeLog
+        - ChangeLog for the UTS Global 3270-support patch (outdated).
+3270.txt
+        - how to use the IBM 3270 display system support.
+cds.txt
+        - s390 common device support (common I/O layer).
+CommonIO
+        - common I/O layer command line parameters, procfs and debugfs  entries
+config3270.sh
+        - example configuration for 3270 devices.
+DASD
+        - information on the DASD disk device driver.
+Debugging390.txt
+        - hints for debugging on s390 systems.
+driver-model.txt
+        - information on s390 devices and the driver model.
+monreader.txt
+        - information on accessing the z/VM monitor stream from Linux.
+s390dbf.txt
+        - information on using the s390 debug feature.
+TAPE
+        - information on the driver for channel-attached tapes.
+zfcpdump
+        - information on the s390 SCSI dump tool.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
index 22f82f21bc60..86320aa3fb0b 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
+++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-S/390 common I/O-Layer - command line parameters and /proc entries
-==================================================================
+S/390 common I/O-Layer - command line parameters, procfs and debugfs entries
+============================================================================
 
 Command line parameters
 -----------------------
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ Command line parameters
 * cio_msg = yes | no
   
   Determines whether information on found devices and sensed device 
-  characteristics should be shown during startup, i. e. messages of the types 
-  "Detected device 0.0.4711 on subchannel 0.0.0042" and "SenseID: Device
-  0.0.4711 reports: ...".
+  characteristics should be shown during startup or when new devices are
+  found, i. e. messages of the types "Detected device 0.0.4711 on subchannel
+  0.0.0042" and "SenseID: Device 0.0.4711 reports: ...".
 
   Default is off.
 
@@ -26,8 +26,10 @@ Command line parameters
   An ignored device can be un-ignored later; see the "/proc entries"-section for
   details.
 
-  The devices must be given either as bus ids (0.0.abcd) or as hexadecimal
-  device numbers (0xabcd or abcd, for 2.4 backward compatibility).
+  The devices must be given either as bus ids (0.x.abcd) or as hexadecimal
+  device numbers (0xabcd or abcd, for 2.4 backward compatibility). If you
+  give a device number 0xabcd, it will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd.
+
   You can use the 'all' keyword to ignore all devices.
   The '!' operator will cause the I/O-layer to _not_ ignore a device.
   The command line is parsed from left to right.
@@ -81,31 +83,36 @@ Command line parameters
   will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored
   devices.
 
-  The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.0.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward
-  compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd).
+  The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.x.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward
+  compatibility, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). Device
+  numbers given as 0xabcd will be interpreted as 0.0.abcd.
+
+* For some of the information present in the /proc filesystem in 2.4 (namely,
+  /proc/subchannels and /proc/chpids), see driver-model.txt.
+  Information formerly in /proc/irq_count is now in /proc/interrupts.
+
 
+debugfs entries
+---------------
 
-* /proc/s390dbf/cio_*/ (S/390 debug feature)
+* /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_*/ (S/390 debug feature)
 
   Some views generated by the debug feature to hold various debug outputs.
 
-  - /proc/s390dbf/cio_crw/sprintf
+  - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_crw/sprintf
     Messages from the processing of pending channel report words (machine check
-    handling), which will also show when CONFIG_DEBUG_CRW is defined.
+    handling).
 
-  - /proc/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf
-    Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer; generally, messages which 
-    will also show when CONFIG_DEBUG_IO is defined.
+  - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_msg/sprintf
+    Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer, including messages
+    printed when cio_msg=yes.
 
-  - /proc/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii
+  - /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii
     Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, 
     which subchannel they were called for, as well as dumps of some data
     structures (like irb in an error case).
 
   The level of logging can be changed to be more or less verbose by piping to 
-  /proc/s390dbf/cio_*/level a number between 0 and 6; see the documentation on
-  the S/390 debug feature (Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt) for details.
-
-* For some of the information present in the /proc filesystem in 2.4 (namely,
-  /proc/subchannels and /proc/chpids), see driver-model.txt.
-  Information formerly in /proc/irq_count is now in /proc/interrupts.
+  /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_*/level a number between 0 and 6; see the
+  documentation on the S/390 debug feature (Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt)
+  for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
index 58919d6a593a..3081927cc2d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
@@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ first:
             timeout value
 -EIO:       the common I/O layer terminated the request due to an error state
 
-If the concurrent sense flag in the extended status word in the irb is set, the
-field irb->scsw.count describes the number of device specific sense bytes
-available in the extended control word irb->scsw.ecw[0]. No device sensing by
-the device driver itself is required.
+If the concurrent sense flag in the extended status word (esw) in the irb is
+set, the field erw.scnt in the esw describes the number of device specific
+sense bytes available in the extended control word irb->scsw.ecw[]. No device
+sensing by the device driver itself is required.
 
 The device interrupt handler can use the following definitions to investigate
 the primary unit check source coded in sense byte 0 :
diff --git a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
index 8418d35484fc..eb1e28ad8822 100644
--- a/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
@@ -67,10 +67,12 @@ probe in an SBUS driver under Linux:
         MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match);
 
         static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = {
-                .name           = "mydevice",
                 .match_table    = mydevice_match,
                 .probe          = mydevice_probe,
                 .remove         = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove),
+                .driver         = {
+                        .name           = "mydevice",
+                },
         };
 
         static int __init mydevice_init(void)
diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
index ef19142896ca..10c8f6922ef4 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ On x86   - You press the key combo 'ALT-SysRq-<command key>'. Note - Some
            keyboards may not have a key labeled 'SysRq'. The 'SysRq' key is
            also known as the 'Print Screen' key. Also some keyboards cannot
            handle so many keys being pressed at the same time, so you might
-           have better luck with "press Alt", "press SysRq", "release Alt",
+           have better luck with "press Alt", "press SysRq", "release SysRq",
            "press <command key>", release everything.
 
 On SPARC - You press 'ALT-STOP-<command key>', I believe.
diff --git a/Documentation/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index eb2f5986e1eb..60953d6c919d 100644
--- a/Documentation/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
                      ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
 
-                            Version 0.15
-                           July 1st, 2007
+                            Version 0.16
+                          August 2nd, 2007
 
                Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
              Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -161,20 +161,22 @@ system.  Enabling the hotkey functionality of thinkpad-acpi signals the
 firmware that such a driver is present, and modifies how the ThinkPad
 firmware will behave in many situations.
 
+The driver enables the hot key feature automatically when loaded.  The
+feature can later be disabled and enabled back at runtime.  The driver
+will also restore the hot key feature to its previous state and mask
+when it is unloaded.
+
 When the hotkey feature is enabled and the hot key mask is set (see
-below), the various hot keys either generate ACPI events in the
-following format:
+below), the driver will report HKEY events in the following format:
 
         ibm/hotkey HKEY 00000080 0000xxxx
 
-or events over the input layer.  The input layer support accepts the
-standard IOCTLs to remap the keycodes assigned to each hotkey.
+Some of these events refer to hot key presses, but not all.
 
-When the input device is open, the driver will suppress any ACPI hot key
-events that get translated into a meaningful input layer event, in order
-to avoid sending duplicate events to userspace.  Hot keys that are
-mapped to KEY_RESERVED in the keymap are not translated, and will always
-generate an ACPI ibm/hotkey HKEY event, and no input layer events.
+The driver will generate events over the input layer for hot keys and
+radio switches, and over the ACPI netlink layer for other events.  The
+input layer support accepts the standard IOCTLs to remap the keycodes
+assigned to each hot key.
 
 The hot key bit mask allows some control over which hot keys generate
 events.  If a key is "masked" (bit set to 0 in the mask), the firmware
@@ -256,6 +258,20 @@ sysfs notes:
                 disabled" postition, and 1 if the switch is in the
                 "radios enabled" position.
 
+        hotkey_report_mode:
+                Returns the state of the procfs ACPI event report mode
+                filter for hot keys.  If it is set to 1 (the default),
+                all hot key presses are reported both through the input
+                layer and also as ACPI events through procfs (but not
+                through netlink).  If it is set to 2, hot key presses
+                are reported only through the input layer.
+
+                This attribute is read-only in kernels 2.6.23 or later,
+                and read-write on earlier kernels.
+
+                May return -EPERM (write access locked out by module
+                parameter) or -EACCES (read-only).
+
 input layer notes:
 
 A Hot key is mapped to a single input layer EV_KEY event, possibly
@@ -393,21 +409,63 @@ unknown by the driver if the ThinkPad firmware triggered these events on
 hot key press or release, but the firmware will do it for either one, not
 both.
 
-If a key is mapped to KEY_RESERVED, it generates no input events at all,
-and it may generate a legacy thinkpad-acpi ACPI hotkey event.
-
+If a key is mapped to KEY_RESERVED, it generates no input events at all.
 If a key is mapped to KEY_UNKNOWN, it generates an input event that
-includes an scan code, and it may also generate a legacy thinkpad-acpi
-ACPI hotkey event.
-
-If a key is mapped to anything else, it will only generate legacy
-thinkpad-acpi ACPI hotkey events if nobody has opened the input device.
+includes an scan code.  If a key is mapped to anything else, it will
+generate input device EV_KEY events.
 
 Non hot-key ACPI HKEY event map:
 0x5001          Lid closed
 0x5002          Lid opened
 0x7000          Radio Switch may have changed state
 
+The above events are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
+compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1.
+
+Compatibility notes:
+
+ibm-acpi and thinkpad-acpi 0.15 (mainline kernels before 2.6.23) never
+supported the input layer, and sent events over the procfs ACPI event
+interface.
+
+To avoid sending duplicate events over the input layer and the ACPI
+event interface, thinkpad-acpi 0.16 implements a module parameter
+(hotkey_report_mode), and also a sysfs device attribute with the same
+name.
+
+Make no mistake here: userspace is expected to switch to using the input
+layer interface of thinkpad-acpi, together with the ACPI netlink event
+interface in kernels 2.6.23 and later, or with the ACPI procfs event
+interface in kernels 2.6.22 and earlier.
+
+If no hotkey_report_mode module parameter is specified (or it is set to
+zero), the driver defaults to mode 1 (see below), and on kernels 2.6.22
+and earlier, also allows one to change the hotkey_report_mode through
+sysfs.  In kernels 2.6.23 and later, where the netlink ACPI event
+interface is available, hotkey_report_mode cannot be changed through
+sysfs (it is read-only).
+
+If the hotkey_report_mode module parameter is set to 1 or 2, it cannot
+be changed later through sysfs (any writes will return -EPERM to signal
+that hotkey_report_mode was locked.  On 2.6.23 and later, where
+hotkey_report_mode cannot be changed at all, writes will return -EACES).
+
+hotkey_report_mode set to 1 makes the driver export through the procfs
+ACPI event interface all hot key presses (which are *also* sent to the
+input layer).  This is a legacy compatibility behaviour, and it is also
+the default mode of operation for the driver.
+
+hotkey_report_mode set to 2 makes the driver filter out the hot key
+presses from the procfs ACPI event interface, so these events will only
+be sent through the input layer.  Userspace that has been updated to use
+the thinkpad-acpi input layer interface should set hotkey_report_mode to
+2.
+
+Hot key press events are never sent to the ACPI netlink event interface.
+Really up-to-date userspace under kernel 2.6.23 and later is to use the
+netlink interface and the input layer interface, and don't bother at all
+with hotkey_report_mode.
+
 
 Bluetooth
 ---------
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2af400609498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+
+Authorizing (or not) your USB devices to connect to the system
+
+(C) 2007 Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <inaky@linux.intel.com> Intel Corporation
+
+This feature allows you to control if a USB device can be used (or
+not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down
+of USB devices, fully controlled by user space.
+
+As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and
+it's interfaces inmediately made available to the users. With this
+modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will
+then it be possible to use it.
+
+Usage:
+
+Authorize a device to connect:
+
+$ echo 1 > /sys/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+
+Deauthorize a device:
+
+$ echo 0 > /sys/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+
+Set new devices connected to hostX to be deauthorized by default (ie:
+lock down):
+
+$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+
+Remove the lock down:
+
+$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+
+By default, Wired USB devices are authorized by default to
+connect. Wireless USB hosts deauthorize by default all new connected
+devices (this is so because we need to do an authentication phase
+before authorizing).
+
+
+Example system lockdown (lame)
+-----------------------
+
+Imagine you want to implement a lockdown so only devices of type XYZ
+can be connected (for example, it is a kiosk machine with a visible
+USB port):
+
+boot up
+rc.local ->
+
+ for host in /sys/bus/devices/usb*
+ do
+    echo 0 > $host/authorized_default
+ done
+
+Hookup an script to udev, for new USB devices
+
+ if device_is_my_type $DEV
+ then
+   echo 1 > $device_path/authorized
+ done
+
+
+Now, device_is_my_type() is where the juice for a lockdown is. Just
+checking if the class, type and protocol match something is the worse
+security verification you can make (or the best, for someone willing
+to break it). If you need something secure, use crypto and Certificate
+Authentication or stuff like that. Something simple for an storage key
+could be:
+
+function device_is_my_type()
+{
+   echo 1 > authorized          # temporarily authorize it
+                                # FIXME: make sure none can mount it
+   mount DEVICENODE /mntpoint
+   sum=$(md5sum /mntpoint/.signature)
+   if [ $sum = $(cat /etc/lockdown/keysum) ]
+   then
+        echo "We are good, connected"
+        umount /mntpoint
+        # Other stuff so others can use it
+   else
+        echo 0 > authorized
+   fi
+}
+
+
+Of course, this is lame, you'd want to do a real certificate
+verification stuff with PKI, so you don't depend on a shared secret,
+etc, but you get the idea. Anybody with access to a device gadget kit
+can fake descriptors and device info. Don't trust that. You are
+welcome.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..97842deec471
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,517 @@
+                        Power Management for USB
+
+                 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+
+                            October 5, 2007
+
+
+
+        What is Power Management?
+        -------------------------
+
+Power Management (PM) is the practice of saving energy by suspending
+parts of a computer system when they aren't being used.  While a
+component is "suspended" it is in a nonfunctional low-power state; it
+might even be turned off completely.  A suspended component can be
+"resumed" (returned to a functional full-power state) when the kernel
+needs to use it.  (There also are forms of PM in which components are
+placed in a less functional but still usable state instead of being
+suspended; an example would be reducing the CPU's clock rate.  This
+document will not discuss those other forms.)
+
+When the parts being suspended include the CPU and most of the rest of
+the system, we speak of it as a "system suspend".  When a particular
+device is turned off while the system as a whole remains running, we
+call it a "dynamic suspend" (also known as a "runtime suspend" or
+"selective suspend").  This document concentrates mostly on how
+dynamic PM is implemented in the USB subsystem, although system PM is
+covered to some extent (see Documentation/power/*.txt for more
+information about system PM).
+
+Note: Dynamic PM support for USB is present only if the kernel was
+built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled.  System PM support is present
+only if the kernel was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND or CONFIG_HIBERNATION
+enabled.
+
+
+        What is Remote Wakeup?
+        ----------------------
+
+When a device has been suspended, it generally doesn't resume until
+the computer tells it to.  Likewise, if the entire computer has been
+suspended, it generally doesn't resume until the user tells it to, say
+by pressing a power button or opening the cover.
+
+However some devices have the capability of resuming by themselves, or
+asking the kernel to resume them, or even telling the entire computer
+to resume.  This capability goes by several names such as "Wake On
+LAN"; we will refer to it generically as "remote wakeup".  When a
+device is enabled for remote wakeup and it is suspended, it may resume
+itself (or send a request to be resumed) in response to some external
+event.  Examples include a suspended keyboard resuming when a key is
+pressed, or a suspended USB hub resuming when a device is plugged in.
+
+
+        When is a USB device idle?
+        --------------------------
+
+A device is idle whenever the kernel thinks it's not busy doing
+anything important and thus is a candidate for being suspended.  The
+exact definition depends on the device's driver; drivers are allowed
+to declare that a device isn't idle even when there's no actual
+communication taking place.  (For example, a hub isn't considered idle
+unless all the devices plugged into that hub are already suspended.)
+In addition, a device isn't considered idle so long as a program keeps
+its usbfs file open, whether or not any I/O is going on.
+
+If a USB device has no driver, its usbfs file isn't open, and it isn't
+being accessed through sysfs, then it definitely is idle.
+
+
+        Forms of dynamic PM
+        -------------------
+
+Dynamic suspends can occur in two ways: manual and automatic.
+"Manual" means that the user has told the kernel to suspend a device,
+whereas "automatic" means that the kernel has decided all by itself to
+suspend a device.  Automatic suspend is called "autosuspend" for
+short.  In general, a device won't be autosuspended unless it has been
+idle for some minimum period of time, the so-called idle-delay time.
+
+Of course, nothing the kernel does on its own initiative should
+prevent the computer or its devices from working properly.  If a
+device has been autosuspended and a program tries to use it, the
+kernel will automatically resume the device (autoresume).  For the
+same reason, an autosuspended device will usually have remote wakeup
+enabled, if the device supports remote wakeup.
+
+It is worth mentioning that many USB drivers don't support
+autosuspend.  In fact, at the time of this writing (Linux 2.6.23) the
+only drivers which do support it are the hub driver, kaweth, asix,
+usblp, usblcd, and usb-skeleton (which doesn't count).  If a
+non-supporting driver is bound to a device, the device won't be
+autosuspended.  In effect, the kernel pretends the device is never
+idle.
+
+We can categorize power management events in two broad classes:
+external and internal.  External events are those triggered by some
+agent outside the USB stack: system suspend/resume (triggered by
+userspace), manual dynamic suspend/resume (also triggered by
+userspace), and remote wakeup (triggered by the device).  Internal
+events are those triggered within the USB stack: autosuspend and
+autoresume.
+
+
+        The user interface for dynamic PM
+        ---------------------------------
+
+The user interface for controlling dynamic PM is located in the power/
+subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in
+/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID.  The
+relevant attribute files are: wakeup, level, and autosuspend.
+
+        power/wakeup
+
+                This file is empty if the device does not support
+                remote wakeup.  Otherwise the file contains either the
+                word "enabled" or the word "disabled", and you can
+                write those words to the file.  The setting determines
+                whether or not remote wakeup will be enabled when the
+                device is next suspended.  (If the setting is changed
+                while the device is suspended, the change won't take
+                effect until the following suspend.)
+
+        power/level
+
+                This file contains one of three words: "on", "auto",
+                or "suspend".  You can write those words to the file
+                to change the device's setting.
+
+                "on" means that the device should be resumed and
+                autosuspend is not allowed.  (Of course, system
+                suspends are still allowed.)
+
+                "auto" is the normal state in which the kernel is
+                allowed to autosuspend and autoresume the device.
+
+                "suspend" means that the device should remain
+                suspended, and autoresume is not allowed.  (But remote
+                wakeup may still be allowed, since it is controlled
+                separately by the power/wakeup attribute.)
+
+        power/autosuspend
+
+                This file contains an integer value, which is the
+                number of seconds the device should remain idle before
+                the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay time).
+                The default is 2.  0 means to autosuspend as soon as
+                the device becomes idle, and -1 means never to
+                autosuspend.  You can write a number to the file to
+                change the autosuspend idle-delay time.
+
+Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend and writing "on" to power/level do
+essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the device from being
+autosuspended.  Yes, this is a redundancy in the API.
+
+(In 2.6.21 writing "0" to power/autosuspend would prevent the device
+from being autosuspended; the behavior was changed in 2.6.22.  The
+power/autosuspend attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.21, and the
+power/level attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.22.)
+
+
+        Changing the default idle-delay time
+        ------------------------------------
+
+The default autosuspend idle-delay time is controlled by a module
+parameter in usbcore.  You can specify the value when usbcore is
+loaded.  For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would
+do:
+
+        modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5
+
+Equivalently, you could add to /etc/modprobe.conf a line saying:
+
+        options usbcore autosuspend=5
+
+Some distributions load the usbcore module very early during the boot
+process, by means of a program or script running from an initramfs
+image.  To alter the parameter value you would have to rebuild that
+image.
+
+If usbcore is compiled into the kernel rather than built as a loadable
+module, you can add
+
+        usbcore.autosuspend=5
+
+to the kernel's boot command line.
+
+Finally, the parameter value can be changed while the system is
+running.  If you do:
+
+        echo 5 >/sys/module/usbcore/parameters/autosuspend
+
+then each new USB device will have its autosuspend idle-delay
+initialized to 5.  (The idle-delay values for already existing devices
+will not be affected.)
+
+Setting the initial default idle-delay to -1 will prevent any
+autosuspend of any USB device.  This is a simple alternative to
+disabling CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND and rebuilding the kernel, and it has the
+added benefit of allowing you to enable autosuspend for selected
+devices.
+
+
+        Warnings
+        --------
+
+The USB specification states that all USB devices must support power
+management.  Nevertheless, the sad fact is that many devices do not
+support it very well.  You can suspend them all right, but when you
+try to resume them they disconnect themselves from the USB bus or
+they stop working entirely.  This seems to be especially prevalent
+among printers and scanners, but plenty of other types of device have
+the same deficiency.
+
+For this reason, by default the kernel disables autosuspend (the
+power/level attribute is initialized to "on") for all devices other
+than hubs.  Hubs, at least, appear to be reasonably well-behaved in
+this regard.
+
+(In 2.6.21 and 2.6.22 this wasn't the case.  Autosuspend was enabled
+by default for almost all USB devices.  A number of people experienced
+problems as a result.)
+
+This means that non-hub devices won't be autosuspended unless the user
+or a program explicitly enables it.  As of this writing there aren't
+any widespread programs which will do this; we hope that in the near
+future device managers such as HAL will take on this added
+responsibility.  In the meantime you can always carry out the
+necessary operations by hand or add them to a udev script.  You can
+also change the idle-delay time; 2 seconds is not the best choice for
+every device.
+
+Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with
+autosuspend there are still problems.  For example, there are
+experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver,
+which manages keyboards and mice, among other things.  Tests with a
+number of keyboards showed that typing on a suspended keyboard, while
+causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, would
+nonetheless frequently result in lost keystrokes.  Tests with mice
+showed that some of them would issue a remote-wakeup request in
+response to button presses but not to motion, and some in response to
+neither.
+
+The kernel will not prevent you from enabling autosuspend on devices
+that can't handle it.  It is even possible in theory to damage a
+device by suspending it at the wrong time -- for example, suspending a
+USB hard disk might cause it to spin down without parking the heads.
+(Highly unlikely, but possible.)  Take care.
+
+
+        The driver interface for Power Management
+        -----------------------------------------
+
+The requirements for a USB driver to support external power management
+are pretty modest; the driver need only define
+
+        .suspend
+        .resume
+        .reset_resume
+
+methods in its usb_driver structure, and the reset_resume method is
+optional.  The methods' jobs are quite simple:
+
+        The suspend method is called to warn the driver that the
+        device is going to be suspended.  If the driver returns a
+        negative error code, the suspend will be aborted.  Normally
+        the driver will return 0, in which case it must cancel all
+        outstanding URBs (usb_kill_urb()) and not submit any more.
+
+        The resume method is called to tell the driver that the
+        device has been resumed and the driver can return to normal
+        operation.  URBs may once more be submitted.
+
+        The reset_resume method is called to tell the driver that
+        the device has been resumed and it also has been reset.
+        The driver should redo any necessary device initialization,
+        since the device has probably lost most or all of its state
+        (although the interfaces will be in the same altsettings as
+        before the suspend).
+
+The reset_resume method is used by the USB Persist facility (see
+Documentation/usb/persist.txt) and it can also be used under certain
+circumstances when CONFIG_USB_PERSIST is not enabled.  Currently, if a
+device is reset during a resume and the driver does not have a
+reset_resume method, the driver won't receive any notification about
+the resume.  Later kernels will call the driver's disconnect method;
+2.6.23 doesn't do this.
+
+USB drivers are bound to interfaces, so their suspend and resume
+methods get called when the interfaces are suspended or resumed.  In
+principle one might want to suspend some interfaces on a device (i.e.,
+force the drivers for those interface to stop all activity) without
+suspending the other interfaces.  The USB core doesn't allow this; all
+interfaces are suspended when the device itself is suspended and all
+interfaces are resumed when the device is resumed.  It isn't possible
+to suspend or resume some but not all of a device's interfaces.  The
+closest you can come is to unbind the interfaces' drivers.
+
+
+        The driver interface for autosuspend and autoresume
+        ---------------------------------------------------
+
+To support autosuspend and autoresume, a driver should implement all
+three of the methods listed above.  In addition, a driver indicates
+that it supports autosuspend by setting the .supports_autosuspend flag
+in its usb_driver structure.  It is then responsible for informing the
+USB core whenever one of its interfaces becomes busy or idle.  The
+driver does so by calling these three functions:
+
+        int  usb_autopm_get_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
+        void usb_autopm_put_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
+        int  usb_autopm_set_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
+
+The functions work by maintaining a counter in the usb_interface
+structure.  When intf->pm_usage_count is > 0 then the interface is
+deemed to be busy, and the kernel will not autosuspend the interface's
+device.  When intf->pm_usage_count is <= 0 then the interface is
+considered to be idle, and the kernel may autosuspend the device.
+
+(There is a similar pm_usage_count field in struct usb_device,
+associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces.
+This field is used only by the USB core.)
+
+The driver owns intf->pm_usage_count; it can modify the value however
+and whenever it likes.  A nice aspect of the usb_autopm_* routines is
+that the changes they make are protected by the usb_device structure's
+PM mutex (udev->pm_mutex); however drivers may change pm_usage_count
+without holding the mutex.
+
+        usb_autopm_get_interface() increments pm_usage_count and
+        attempts an autoresume if the new value is > 0 and the
+        device is suspended.
+
+        usb_autopm_put_interface() decrements pm_usage_count and
+        attempts an autosuspend if the new value is <= 0 and the
+        device isn't suspended.
+
+        usb_autopm_set_interface() leaves pm_usage_count alone.
+        It attempts an autoresume if the value is > 0 and the device
+        is suspended, and it attempts an autosuspend if the value is
+        <= 0 and the device isn't suspended.
+
+There also are a couple of utility routines drivers can use:
+
+        usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 1 and then calls
+        usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autoresume.
+
+        usb_autopm_disable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls
+        usb_autopm_set_interface(), which will attempt an autosuspend.
+
+The conventional usage pattern is that a driver calls
+usb_autopm_get_interface() in its open routine and
+usb_autopm_put_interface() in its close or release routine.  But
+other patterns are possible.
+
+The autosuspend attempts mentioned above will often fail for one
+reason or another.  For example, the power/level attribute might be
+set to "on", or another interface in the same device might not be
+idle.  This is perfectly normal.  If the reason for failure was that
+the device hasn't been idle for long enough, a delayed workqueue
+routine is automatically set up to carry out the operation when the
+autosuspend idle-delay has expired.
+
+Autoresume attempts also can fail.  This will happen if power/level is
+set to "suspend" or if the device doesn't manage to resume properly.
+Unlike autosuspend, there's no delay for an autoresume.
+
+
+        Other parts of the driver interface
+        -----------------------------------
+
+Sometimes a driver needs to make sure that remote wakeup is enabled
+during autosuspend.  For example, there's not much point
+autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a
+remote wakeup by typing on it.  If the driver sets
+intf->needs_remote_wakeup to 1, the kernel won't autosuspend the
+device if remote wakeup isn't available or has been disabled through
+the power/wakeup attribute.  (If the device is already autosuspended,
+though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it.
+Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which
+time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.)
+
+The usb_autopm_* routines have to run in a sleepable process context;
+they must not be called from an interrupt handler or while holding a
+spinlock.  In fact, the entire autosuspend mechanism is not well geared
+toward interrupt-driven operation.  However there is one thing a
+driver can do in an interrupt handler:
+
+        usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev);
+
+This sets udev->last_busy to the current time.  udev->last_busy is the
+field used for idle-delay calculations; updating it will cause any
+pending autosuspend to be moved back.  The usb_autopm_* routines will
+also set the last_busy field to the current time.
+
+Calling urb_mark_last_busy() from within an URB completion handler is
+subject to races: The kernel may have just finished deciding the
+device has been idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to
+calling the driver's suspend method.  The driver would have to be
+responsible for synchronizing its suspend method with its URB
+completion handler and causing the autosuspend to fail with -EBUSY if
+an URB had completed too recently.
+
+External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way,
+only autosuspend calls.  The driver can tell them apart by checking
+udev->auto_pm; this flag will be set to 1 for internal PM events
+(autosuspend or autoresume) and 0 for external PM events.
+
+Many of the ingredients in the autosuspend framework are oriented
+towards interfaces: The usb_interface structure contains the
+pm_usage_cnt field, and the usb_autopm_* routines take an interface
+pointer as their argument.  But somewhat confusingly, a few of the
+pieces (usb_mark_last_busy() and udev->auto_pm) use the usb_device
+structure instead.  Drivers need to keep this straight; they can call
+interface_to_usbdev() to find the device structure for a given
+interface.
+
+
+        Locking requirements
+        --------------------
+
+All three suspend/resume methods are always called while holding the
+usb_device's PM mutex.  For external events -- but not necessarily for
+autosuspend or autoresume -- the device semaphore (udev->dev.sem) will
+also be held.  This implies that external suspend/resume events are
+mutually exclusive with calls to probe, disconnect, pre_reset, and
+post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal
+suspend/resume events as well.
+
+If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some
+critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex.
+Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the
+usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing:
+
+        down(&udev->dev.sem);
+        rc = usb_autopm_get_interface(intf);
+
+and at the end of the critical section:
+
+        if (!rc)
+                usb_autopm_put_interface(intf);
+        up(&udev->dev.sem);
+
+Holding the device semaphore will block all external PM calls, and the
+usb_autopm_get_interface() will prevent any internal PM calls, even if
+it fails.  (Exercise: Why?)
+
+The rules for locking order are:
+
+        Never acquire any device semaphore while holding any PM mutex.
+
+        Never acquire udev->pm_mutex while holding the PM mutex for
+        a device that isn't a descendant of udev.
+
+In other words, PM mutexes should only be acquired going up the device
+tree, and they should be acquired only after locking all the device
+semaphores you need to hold.  These rules don't matter to drivers very
+much; they usually affect just the USB core.
+
+Still, drivers do need to be careful.  For example, many drivers use a
+private mutex to synchronize their normal I/O activities with their
+disconnect method.  Now if the driver supports autosuspend then it
+must call usb_autopm_put_interface() from somewhere -- maybe from its
+close method.  It should make the call while holding the private mutex,
+since a driver shouldn't call any of the usb_autopm_* functions for an
+interface from which it has been unbound.
+
+But the usb_autpm_* routines always acquire the device's PM mutex, and
+consequently the locking order has to be: private mutex first, PM
+mutex second.  Since the suspend method is always called with the PM
+mutex held, it mustn't try to acquire the private mutex.  It has to
+synchronize with the driver's I/O activities in some other way.
+
+
+        Interaction between dynamic PM and system PM
+        --------------------------------------------
+
+Dynamic power management and system power management can interact in
+a couple of ways.
+
+Firstly, a device may already be manually suspended or autosuspended
+when a system suspend occurs.  Since system suspends are supposed to
+be as transparent as possible, the device should remain suspended
+following the system resume.  The 2.6.23 kernel obeys this principle
+for manually suspended devices but not for autosuspended devices; they
+do get resumed when the system wakes up.  (Presumably they will be
+autosuspended again after their idle-delay time expires.)  In later
+kernels this behavior will be fixed.
+
+(There is an exception.  If a device would undergo a reset-resume
+instead of a normal resume, and the device is enabled for remote
+wakeup, then the reset-resume takes place even if the device was
+already suspended when the system suspend began.  The justification is
+that a reset-resume is a kind of remote-wakeup event.  Or to put it
+another way, a device which needs a reset won't be able to generate
+normal remote-wakeup signals, so it ought to be resumed immediately.)
+
+Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system
+suspend is underway.  The window for this is short, since system
+suspends don't take long (a few seconds usually), but it can happen.
+For example, a suspended device may send a remote-wakeup signal while
+the system is suspending.  The remote wakeup may succeed, which would
+cause the system suspend to abort.  If the remote wakeup doesn't
+succeed, it may still remain active and thus cause the system to
+resume as soon as the system suspend is complete.  Or the remote
+wakeup may fail and get lost.  Which outcome occurs depends on timing
+and on the hardware and firmware design.
+
+More interestingly, a device might undergo a manual resume or
+autoresume during system suspend.  With current kernels this shouldn't
+happen, because manual resumes must be initiated by userspace and
+autoresumes happen in response to I/O requests, but all user processes
+and I/O should be quiescent during a system suspend -- thanks to the
+freezer.  However there are plans to do away with the freezer, which
+would mean these things would become possible.  If and when this comes
+about, the USB core will carefully arrange matters so that either type
+of resume will block until the entire system has resumed.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
index 5b635ae84944..4e0b62b8566f 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
@@ -428,6 +428,17 @@ Options supported:
   See http://www.uuhaus.de/linux/palmconnect.html for up-to-date
   information on this driver.
 
+Winchiphead CH341 Driver
+
+  This driver is for the Winchiphead CH341 USB-RS232 Converter. This chip
+  also implements an IEEE 1284 parallel port, I2C and SPI, but that is not
+  supported by the driver. The protocol was analyzed from the behaviour
+  of the Windows driver, no datasheet is available at present.
+  The manufacturer's website: http://www.winchiphead.com/.
+  For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact
+  frank@kingswood-consulting.co.uk.
+
+
 Generic Serial driver
 
   If your device is not one of the above listed devices, compatible with
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
index 53ae866ae37b..2917ce4ffdc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
@@ -34,9 +34,12 @@ if usbmon is built into the kernel.
 Verify that bus sockets are present.
 
 # ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon
-1s  1t  1u  2s  2t  2u  3s  3t  3u  4s  4t  4u
+0s  0t  0u  1s  1t  1u  2s  2t  2u  3s  3t  3u  4s  4t  4u
 #
 
+Now you can choose to either use the sockets numbered '0' (to capture packets on
+all buses), and skip to step #3, or find the bus used by your device with step #2.
+
 2. Find which bus connects to the desired device
 
 Run "cat /proc/bus/usb/devices", and find the T-line which corresponds to
@@ -56,6 +59,10 @@ Bus=03 means it's bus 3.
 
 # cat /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
 
+to listen on a single bus, otherwise, to listen on all buses, type:
+
+# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon/0u > /tmp/1.mon.out
+
 This process will be reading until killed. Naturally, the output can be
 redirected to a desirable location. This is preferred, because it is going
 to be quite long.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
index 177159c5f4c4..d97cf7cc6088 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
@@ -147,3 +147,4 @@
 146 -> SSAI Ultrasound Video Interface                     [414a:5353]
 147 -> VoodooTV 200 (USA)                                  [121a:3000]
 148 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 2                                  [dbc0:d200]
+149 -> Typhoon TV-Tuner PCI (50684)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..00cb646a4bde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+  0 -> UNKNOWN/GENERIC                                     [0070:3400]
+  1 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1800lp                           [0070:7600]
+  2 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1800                             [0070:7800,0070:7801]
+  3 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1250                             [0070:7911]
+  4 -> DViCO FusionHDTV5 Express                           [18ac:d500]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index 3f8aeab50a10..a14545300e4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -88,11 +88,11 @@
  87 -> ADS Instant TV Duo Cardbus PTV331        [0331:1421]
  88 -> Tevion/KWorld DVB-T 220RF                [17de:7201]
  89 -> ELSA EX-VISION 700TV                     [1048:226c]
- 90 -> Kworld ATSC110                           [17de:7350]
+ 90 -> Kworld ATSC110/115                       [17de:7350,17de:7352]
  91 -> AVerMedia A169 B                         [1461:7360]
  92 -> AVerMedia A169 B1                        [1461:6360]
  93 -> Medion 7134 Bridge #2                    [16be:0005]
- 94 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T Hybrid Cardbus         [5168:3306,5168:3502]
+ 94 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T Hybrid Cardbus/MSI TV @nywhere A/D NB [5168:3306,5168:3502,4e42:3502]
  95 -> LifeView FlyVIDEO3000 (NTSC)             [5169:0138]
  96 -> Medion Md8800 Quadro                     [16be:0007,16be:0008]
  97 -> LifeView FlyDVB-S /Acorp TV134DS         [5168:0300,4e42:0300]
@@ -115,3 +115,4 @@
 114 -> KWorld DVB-T 210                         [17de:7250]
 115 -> Sabrent PCMCIA TV-PCB05                  [0919:2003]
 116 -> 10MOONS TM300 TV Card                    [1131:2304]
+117 -> Avermedia Super 007                      [1461:f01d]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt
index 5dd3109a8b3f..5a27af2ee1c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt
@@ -407,8 +407,10 @@ Description
                 u32 length;             // Length of this frame
                 u32 offset_low;         // Offset in the file of the
                 u32 offset_high;        // start of this frame
-                u32 mask1;              // Bits 0-1 are the type mask:
+                u32 mask1;              // Bits 0-2 are the type mask:
                                         // 1=I, 2=P, 4=B
+                                        // 0=End of Program Index, other fields
+                                        //   are invalid.
                 u32 pts;                // The PTS of the frame
                 u32 mask2;              // Bit 0 is bit 32 of the pts.
         };
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8242f52d0f22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+
+What is Linux Memory Policy?
+
+In the Linux kernel, "memory policy" determines from which node the kernel will
+allocate memory in a NUMA system or in an emulated NUMA system.  Linux has
+supported platforms with Non-Uniform Memory Access architectures since 2.4.?.
+The current memory policy support was added to Linux 2.6 around May 2004.  This
+document attempts to describe the concepts and APIs of the 2.6 memory policy
+support.
+
+Memory policies should not be confused with cpusets (Documentation/cpusets.txt)
+which is an administrative mechanism for restricting the nodes from which
+memory may be allocated by a set of processes. Memory policies are a
+programming interface that a NUMA-aware application can take advantage of.  When
+both cpusets and policies are applied to a task, the restrictions of the cpuset
+takes priority.  See "MEMORY POLICIES AND CPUSETS" below for more details.
+
+MEMORY POLICY CONCEPTS
+
+Scope of Memory Policies
+
+The Linux kernel supports _scopes_ of memory policy, described here from
+most general to most specific:
+
+    System Default Policy:  this policy is "hard coded" into the kernel.  It
+    is the policy that governs all page allocations that aren't controlled
+    by one of the more specific policy scopes discussed below.  When the
+    system is "up and running", the system default policy will use "local
+    allocation" described below.  However, during boot up, the system
+    default policy will be set to interleave allocations across all nodes
+    with "sufficient" memory, so as not to overload the initial boot node
+    with boot-time allocations.
+
+    Task/Process Policy:  this is an optional, per-task policy.  When defined
+    for a specific task, this policy controls all page allocations made by or
+    on behalf of the task that aren't controlled by a more specific scope.
+    If a task does not define a task policy, then all page allocations that
+    would have been controlled by the task policy "fall back" to the System
+    Default Policy.
+
+        The task policy applies to the entire address space of a task. Thus,
+        it is inheritable, and indeed is inherited, across both fork()
+        [clone() w/o the CLONE_VM flag] and exec*().  This allows a parent task
+        to establish the task policy for a child task exec()'d from an
+        executable image that has no awareness of memory policy.  See the
+        MEMORY POLICY APIS section, below, for an overview of the system call
+        that a task may use to set/change it's task/process policy.
+
+        In a multi-threaded task, task policies apply only to the thread
+        [Linux kernel task] that installs the policy and any threads
+        subsequently created by that thread.  Any sibling threads existing
+        at the time a new task policy is installed retain their current
+        policy.
+
+        A task policy applies only to pages allocated after the policy is
+        installed.  Any pages already faulted in by the task when the task
+        changes its task policy remain where they were allocated based on
+        the policy at the time they were allocated.
+
+    VMA Policy:  A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's
+    virtual adddress space.  A task may define a specific policy for a range
+    of its virtual address space.   See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section,
+    below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA
+    policy.
+
+    A VMA policy will govern the allocation of pages that back this region of
+    the address space.  Any regions of the task's address space that don't
+    have an explicit VMA policy will fall back to the task policy, which may
+    itself fall back to the System Default Policy.
+
+    VMA policies have a few complicating details:
+
+        VMA policy applies ONLY to anonymous pages.  These include pages
+        allocated for anonymous segments, such as the task stack and heap, and
+        any regions of the address space mmap()ed with the MAP_ANONYMOUS flag.
+        If a VMA policy is applied to a file mapping, it will be ignored if
+        the mapping used the MAP_SHARED flag.  If the file mapping used the
+        MAP_PRIVATE flag, the VMA policy will only be applied when an
+        anonymous page is allocated on an attempt to write to the mapping--
+        i.e., at Copy-On-Write.
+
+        VMA policies are shared between all tasks that share a virtual address
+        space--a.k.a. threads--independent of when the policy is installed; and
+        they are inherited across fork().  However, because VMA policies refer
+        to a specific region of a task's address space, and because the address
+        space is discarded and recreated on exec*(), VMA policies are NOT
+        inheritable across exec().  Thus, only NUMA-aware applications may
+        use VMA policies.
+
+        A task may install a new VMA policy on a sub-range of a previously
+        mmap()ed region.  When this happens, Linux splits the existing virtual
+        memory area into 2 or 3 VMAs, each with it's own policy.
+
+        By default, VMA policy applies only to pages allocated after the policy
+        is installed.  Any pages already faulted into the VMA range remain
+        where they were allocated based on the policy at the time they were
+        allocated.  However, since 2.6.16, Linux supports page migration via
+        the mbind() system call, so that page contents can be moved to match
+        a newly installed policy.
+
+    Shared Policy:  Conceptually, shared policies apply to "memory objects"
+    mapped shared into one or more tasks' distinct address spaces.  An
+    application installs a shared policies the same way as VMA policies--using
+    the mbind() system call specifying a range of virtual addresses that map
+    the shared object.  However, unlike VMA policies, which can be considered
+    to be an attribute of a range of a task's address space, shared policies
+    apply directly to the shared object.  Thus, all tasks that attach to the
+    object share the policy, and all pages allocated for the shared object,
+    by any task, will obey the shared policy.
+
+        As of 2.6.22, only shared memory segments, created by shmget() or
+        mmap(MAP_ANONYMOUS|MAP_SHARED), support shared policy.  When shared
+        policy support was added to Linux, the associated data structures were
+        added to hugetlbfs shmem segments.  At the time, hugetlbfs did not
+        support allocation at fault time--a.k.a lazy allocation--so hugetlbfs
+        shmem segments were never "hooked up" to the shared policy support.
+        Although hugetlbfs segments now support lazy allocation, their support
+        for shared policy has not been completed.
+
+        As mentioned above [re: VMA policies], allocations of page cache
+        pages for regular files mmap()ed with MAP_SHARED ignore any VMA
+        policy installed on the virtual address range backed by the shared
+        file mapping.  Rather, shared page cache pages, including pages backing
+        private mappings that have not yet been written by the task, follow
+        task policy, if any, else System Default Policy.
+
+        The shared policy infrastructure supports different policies on subset
+        ranges of the shared object.  However, Linux still splits the VMA of
+        the task that installs the policy for each range of distinct policy.
+        Thus, different tasks that attach to a shared memory segment can have
+        different VMA configurations mapping that one shared object.  This
+        can be seen by examining the /proc/<pid>/numa_maps of tasks sharing
+        a shared memory region, when one task has installed shared policy on
+        one or more ranges of the region.
+
+Components of Memory Policies
+
+    A Linux memory policy is a tuple consisting of a "mode" and an optional set
+    of nodes.  The mode determine the behavior of the policy, while the
+    optional set of nodes can be viewed as the arguments to the behavior.
+
+   Internally, memory policies are implemented by a reference counted
+   structure, struct mempolicy.  Details of this structure will be discussed
+   in context, below, as required to explain the behavior.
+
+        Note:  in some functions AND in the struct mempolicy itself, the mode
+        is called "policy".  However, to avoid confusion with the policy tuple,
+        this document will continue to use the term "mode".
+
+   Linux memory policy supports the following 4 behavioral modes:
+
+        Default Mode--MPOL_DEFAULT:  The behavior specified by this mode is
+        context or scope dependent.
+
+            As mentioned in the Policy Scope section above, during normal
+            system operation, the System Default Policy is hard coded to
+            contain the Default mode.
+
+            In this context, default mode means "local" allocation--that is
+            attempt to allocate the page from the node associated with the cpu
+            where the fault occurs.  If the "local" node has no memory, or the
+            node's memory can be exhausted [no free pages available], local
+            allocation will "fallback to"--attempt to allocate pages from--
+            "nearby" nodes, in order of increasing "distance".
+
+                Implementation detail -- subject to change:  "Fallback" uses
+                a per node list of sibling nodes--called zonelists--built at
+                boot time, or when nodes or memory are added or removed from
+                the system [memory hotplug].  These per node zonelist are
+                constructed with nodes in order of increasing distance based
+                on information provided by the platform firmware.
+
+            When a task/process policy or a shared policy contains the Default
+            mode, this also means "local allocation", as described above.
+
+            In the context of a VMA, Default mode means "fall back to task
+            policy"--which may or may not specify Default mode.  Thus, Default
+            mode can not be counted on to mean local allocation when used
+            on a non-shared region of the address space.  However, see
+            MPOL_PREFERRED below.
+
+            The Default mode does not use the optional set of nodes.
+
+        MPOL_BIND:  This mode specifies that memory must come from the
+        set of nodes specified by the policy.
+
+            The memory policy APIs do not specify an order in which the nodes
+            will be searched.  However, unlike "local allocation", the Bind
+            policy does not consider the distance between the nodes.  Rather,
+            allocations will fallback to the nodes specified by the policy in
+            order of numeric node id.  Like everything in Linux, this is subject
+            to change.
+
+        MPOL_PREFERRED:  This mode specifies that the allocation should be
+        attempted from the single node specified in the policy.  If that
+        allocation fails, the kernel will search other nodes, exactly as
+        it would for a local allocation that started at the preferred node
+        in increasing distance from the preferred node.  "Local" allocation
+        policy can be viewed as a Preferred policy that starts at the node
+        containing the cpu where the allocation takes place.
+
+            Internally, the Preferred policy uses a single node--the
+            preferred_node member of struct mempolicy.  A "distinguished
+            value of this preferred_node, currently '-1', is interpreted
+            as "the node containing the cpu where the allocation takes
+            place"--local allocation.  This is the way to specify
+            local allocation for a specific range of addresses--i.e. for
+            VMA policies.
+
+        MPOL_INTERLEAVED:  This mode specifies that page allocations be
+        interleaved, on a page granularity, across the nodes specified in
+        the policy.  This mode also behaves slightly differently, based on
+        the context where it is used:
+
+            For allocation of anonymous pages and shared memory pages,
+            Interleave mode indexes the set of nodes specified by the policy
+            using the page offset of the faulting address into the segment
+            [VMA] containing the address modulo the number of nodes specified
+            by the policy.  It then attempts to allocate a page, starting at
+            the selected node, as if the node had been specified by a Preferred
+            policy or had been selected by a local allocation.  That is,
+            allocation will follow the per node zonelist.
+
+            For allocation of page cache pages, Interleave mode indexes the set
+            of nodes specified by the policy using a node counter maintained
+            per task.  This counter wraps around to the lowest specified node
+            after it reaches the highest specified node.  This will tend to
+            spread the pages out over the nodes specified by the policy based
+            on the order in which they are allocated, rather than based on any
+            page offset into an address range or file.  During system boot up,
+            the temporary interleaved system default policy works in this
+            mode.
+
+MEMORY POLICY APIs
+
+Linux supports 3 system calls for controlling memory policy.  These APIS
+always affect only the calling task, the calling task's address space, or
+some shared object mapped into the calling task's address space.
+
+        Note:  the headers that define these APIs and the parameter data types
+        for user space applications reside in a package that is not part of
+        the Linux kernel.  The kernel system call interfaces, with the 'sys_'
+        prefix, are defined in <linux/syscalls.h>; the mode and flag
+        definitions are defined in <linux/mempolicy.h>.
+
+Set [Task] Memory Policy:
+
+        long set_mempolicy(int mode, const unsigned long *nmask,
+                                        unsigned long maxnode);
+
+        Set's the calling task's "task/process memory policy" to mode
+        specified by the 'mode' argument and the set of nodes defined
+        by 'nmask'.  'nmask' points to a bit mask of node ids containing
+        at least 'maxnode' ids.
+
+        See the set_mempolicy(2) man page for more details
+
+
+Get [Task] Memory Policy or Related Information
+
+        long get_mempolicy(int *mode,
+                           const unsigned long *nmask, unsigned long maxnode,
+                           void *addr, int flags);
+
+        Queries the "task/process memory policy" of the calling task, or
+        the policy or location of a specified virtual address, depending
+        on the 'flags' argument.
+
+        See the get_mempolicy(2) man page for more details
+
+
+Install VMA/Shared Policy for a Range of Task's Address Space
+
+        long mbind(void *start, unsigned long len, int mode,
+                   const unsigned long *nmask, unsigned long maxnode,
+                   unsigned flags);
+
+        mbind() installs the policy specified by (mode, nmask, maxnodes) as
+        a VMA policy for the range of the calling task's address space
+        specified by the 'start' and 'len' arguments.  Additional actions
+        may be requested via the 'flags' argument.
+
+        See the mbind(2) man page for more details.
+
+MEMORY POLICY COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
+
+Although not strictly part of the Linux implementation of memory policy,
+a command line tool, numactl(8), exists that allows one to:
+
++ set the task policy for a specified program via set_mempolicy(2), fork(2) and
+  exec(2)
+
++ set the shared policy for a shared memory segment via mbind(2)
+
+The numactl(8) tool is packages with the run-time version of the library
+containing the memory policy system call wrappers.  Some distributions
+package the headers and compile-time libraries in a separate development
+package.
+
+
+MEMORY POLICIES AND CPUSETS
+
+Memory policies work within cpusets as described above.  For memory policies
+that require a node or set of nodes, the nodes are restricted to the set of
+nodes whose memories are allowed by the cpuset constraints.  If the
+intersection of the set of nodes specified for the policy and the set of nodes
+allowed by the cpuset is the empty set, the policy is considered invalid and
+cannot be installed.
+
+The interaction of memory policies and cpusets can be problematic for a
+couple of reasons:
+
+1) the memory policy APIs take physical node id's as arguments.  However, the
+   memory policy APIs do not provide a way to determine what nodes are valid
+   in the context where the application is running.  An application MAY consult
+   the cpuset file system [directly or via an out of tree, and not generally
+   available, libcpuset API] to obtain this information, but then the
+   application must be aware that it is running in a cpuset and use what are
+   intended primarily as administrative APIs.
+
+   However, as long as the policy specifies at least one node that is valid
+   in the controlling cpuset, the policy can be used.
+
+2) when tasks in two cpusets share access to a memory region, such as shared
+   memory segments created by shmget() of mmap() with the MAP_ANONYMOUS and
+   MAP_SHARED flags, and any of the tasks install shared policy on the region,
+   only nodes whose memories are allowed in both cpusets may be used in the
+   policies.  Again, obtaining this information requires "stepping outside"
+   the memory policy APIs, as well as knowing in what cpusets other task might
+   be attaching to the shared region, to use the cpuset information.
+   Furthermore, if the cpusets' allowed memory sets are disjoint, "local"
+   allocation is the only valid policy.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX b/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c3ea47e507fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+00-INDEX
+        - this file.
+pcwd-watchdog.txt
+        - documentation for Berkshire Products PC Watchdog ISA cards.
+src/
+        - directory holding watchdog related example programs.
+watchdog-api.txt
+        - description of the Linux Watchdog driver API.
+wdt.txt
+        - description of the Watchdog Timer Interfaces for Linux.